Micro Motion 1600 Owner's Manual
Pubblicità
Pubblicità
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600, Rev AB
November 2022
Micro Motion
™
1600 with Ethernet
Transmitter
Configuration and Use Manual
Safety messages
Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each safety message carefully before proceeding to the next step.
Safety and approval information
This Micro Motion product complies with all applicable European directives when properly installed in accordance with the instructions in this manual. Refer to the EU Declaration of Conformity for directives that apply to this product. The following are available: the EU Declaration of Conformity, with all applicable European directives, and the complete ATEX installation drawings and instructions. In addition, the IECEx installation instructions for installations outside of the European Union and the CSA installation instructions for installations in North America are available at Emerson.com
or through your local Micro Motion support center.
Information affixed to equipment that complies with the Pressure Equipment Directive, can be found at Emerson.com
. For hazardous installations in Europe, refer to standard EN 60079-14 if national standards do not apply.
Other information
Troubleshooting information can be found in the Configuration Manual . Product data sheets and manuals are available from the
Micro Motion website at Emerson.com
.
Return policy
Follow Micro Motion procedures when returning equipment. These procedures ensure legal compliance with government transportation agencies and help provide a safe working environment for Micro Motion employees. If you fail to follow Micro
Motion procedures, then Micro Motion will not accept your returned equipment.
Return procedures and forms are available on our web support site at Emerson.com
, or by calling the Micro Motion Customer
Service department.
2
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Contents
November 2022
Contents
Configure advanced options for process measurement............................................ 71
Configuration and Use Manual 3
Contents
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
4 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Contents
November 2022
17.26 1600 Transmitter is not powering on or lost power while using Power on Ethernet (PoE).....216
Configuration and Use Manual 5
Contents
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
C.7 Import the SSL Certificate into Microsoft
.............................................................. 237
6 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Before you begin
November 2022
1 Before you begin
1.1 About this manual
This manual helps you configure, commission, use, maintain, and troubleshoot a Micro Motion 1600 transmitter with Ethernet.
Important
This manual assumes that:
• The transmitter has been installed correctly and completely according to the instructions in the transmitter installation manual.
• Users understand basic transmitter and sensor installation, configuration, and maintenance concepts and procedures.
1.2 Hazard messages
This document uses the following criteria for hazard messages based on ANSI standards Z535.6-2011
(R2017).
DANGER
Serious injury or death will occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
WARNING
Serious injury or death could occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
CAUTION
Minor or moderate injury will or could occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
NOTICE
Data loss, property damage, hardware damage, or software damage can occur if a situation is not avoided.
There is no credible risk of physical injury.
Physical access
WARNING
Unauthorized personnel can potentially cause significant damage and/or misconfiguration of end users' equipment. Protect against all intentional or unintentional unauthorized use.
Physical security is an important part of any security program and fundamental to protecting your system.
Restrict physical access to protect users' assets. This is true for all systems used within the facility.
Configuration and Use Manual 7
8
Before you begin
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
1.3 Related documents
You can find all product documentation on the product documentation DVD shipped with the product or at
Emerson.com
.
See any of the following documents for more information:
• Micro Motion 1600 Transmitters Product Data Sheet
• Micro Motion 1600 Transmitters EtherNet/IP Rockwell RSLogix Integration Guide
• Micro Motion 1600 Ethernet Transmitters Installation Guide
• Sensor installation manual
• Replacing the Electronics Assembly Module for the 1600 Transmitter
1.4 Communication methods
You can use several different communications methods to interface with the transmitter. You may use different methods in different locations or for different tasks.
Interface
Display
Universal Service Port
Ethernet ports
Tool
Tactile buttons
ProLink ™ III
Web browser (http)
• EtherNet/IP
• Modbus ® TCP
For information about how to use the communication tools, see the appendices in this manual.
Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Quick start
November 2022
2 Quick start
2.1 Power up the transmitter
The transmitter must be powered up for all configuration and commissioning tasks, or for process measurement.
Procedure
1. Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that a new device on the network does not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
2. Verify that the cables are connected to the transmitter as described in the installation manual.
3. Verify that all transmitter and sensor covers and seals are closed.
WARNING
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, ensure that all covers and seals are tightly closed. For hazardous area installations, applying power while housing covers are removed or loose can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
4. Turn on the electrical power at the power supply.
Postrequisites
Although the sensor is ready to receive process fluid shortly after power-up, the electronics can take up to
10 minutes to reach thermal equilibrium. Therefore, if this is the initial startup, or if power has been off long enough to allow components to reach ambient temperature, allow the electronics to warm up for approximately 10 minutes before relying on process measurements. During this warm-up period, you may observe minor measurement instability or inaccuracy.
2.2 Check meter status
Check the meter for any error conditions that require user action or that affect measurement accuracy.
Procedure
1. Wait approximately 10 seconds for the power-up sequence to complete.
Immediately after power-up, the transmitter runs through diagnostic routines and checks for error conditions. During the power-up sequence, the Transmitter Initializing alert is active. This alert should clear automatically when the power-up sequence is complete.
2. Check the status LED on the transmitter.
Table 2-1: Status LED and device status (MMI mode)
Status LED condition
Solid green
Solid yellow
Device status
No alerts are active.
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Out of Specification,
Maintenance Required, or Function Check.
Configuration and Use Manual 9
Quick start
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table 2-1: Status LED and device status (MMI mode) (continued)
Status LED condition
Solid red
Flashing yellow (1 Hz)
Device status
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Failure.
The Function Check in Progress alert is active.
Table 2-2: Network status LED and Ethernet network connection status
Network status LED condition
Flashing green
Solid green
Flashing red
Solid red
Network status
No connections made with primary protocol host.
Connection made with primary protocol host.
Connection from primary protocol host has timed out.
Address Conflict Detection (ACD) algorithm has detected a duplicate IP address (All 1600 transmitter Ethernet communications are stopped.)
2.3 Commissioning wizards
The transmitter menu includes a Guided Setup to help you move quickly through the most common configuration parameters. ProLink III also provides a commissioning wizard.
By default, when the transmitter starts up, the Guided Setup menu is offered. You can choose to use it or not.
You can also choose whether or not Guided Setup is displayed automatically.
• To enter Guided Setup upon transmitter startup, choose Yes at the prompt.
• To enter Guided Setup after transmitter startup, choose Menu → Startup Tasks .
• To control the automatic display of Guided Setup, choose Menu → Configuration → Guided Setup .
For information on the ProLink III commissioning wizard, see the Micro Motion ProLink III with ProcessViz
Software User Manual .
As the commissioning wizards are self guided, they are not documented in detail.
2.4 Make a startup connection to the transmitter
For all configuration tools except the display, you must have an active connection to the transmitter to configure the transmitter.
Procedure
Identify the connection type to use, and follow the instructions for that connection type in the appropriate appendix.
Communications tool
ProLink III
Web browser
Connection type to use
Service port
Ethernet
Instructions
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
10 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Quick start
November 2022
2.5 Set the transmitter clock
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Time/Date/Tag
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Clock
Configuration → Time/Date/Tag
The transmitter clock provides timestamp data for alerts, service logs, history logs, and all other timers and dates in the system. You can set the clock for your local time or for any standard time you want to use.
Tip
You may find it convenient to set all of your transmitter clocks to the same time, even if the transmitters are in different time zones.
Procedure
1. Select the time zone that you want to use.
2. If you need a custom time zone, select Special Time Zone and enter your time zone as a difference from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
3. Set the time appropriately for the selected time zone.
Tip
The transmitter does not adjust for Daylight Savings Time. If you observe Daylight Savings Time, you must reset the transmitter clock manually.
4. Set the month, day, and year.
The transmitter tracks the year and automatically adds a day for leap years.
2.6 View the licensed features (optional)
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → About → Licenses → Licensed Features
Device Tools → Device Information → Licensed Features
Configuration → Device Information → Licensed Features
The transmitter license controls the features (applications) that are enabled on the transmitter. You can view the licensed features to ensure that the transmitter was ordered with the required features.
Licensed features are purchased and available for permanent use. The options model code represents the licensed features.
A trial license allows you to explore features before purchasing. The trial license enables the specified features for a limited number of days. This number is displayed for reference. At the end of this period, the feature will no longer be available.
To purchase additional features or request a trial license, either write down or record the Unique ID Number and current license key from your transmitter and then contact customer service. To enable the additional features or trial license, you will need to install the new license on the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 11
Quick start
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2.7 Set informational parameters
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Device Information
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters
Configuration → Time/Date/Tag
You can set several parameters that identify or describe the transmitter and sensor. These parameters are not used in processing and are not required.
Procedure
1. Set informational parameters for the transmitter.
a) Set Transmitter Serial Number to the serial number of your transmitter.
The transmitter serial number is provided on the metal tag that is attached to the transmitter housing.
b) Set Descriptor to any desired description of this transmitter or measurement point.
c) Set Message to any desired message.
d) Verify that Model Code (Base) is set to the base model code of the transmitter.
The base model code completely describes your transmitter, except for the features that can be licensed independently. The base model code is set at the factory.
e) Set Model Code (Options) to the options model code of the transmitter.
The options model code describes the independent features that have been licensed for this transmitter. The original options model code is set at the factory. If you license additional options for this transmitter, Emerson will supply an updated options model code.
2. Set informational parameters for the sensor.
a) Set Sensor Serial Number to the serial number of the sensor connected to this transmitter.
The sensor serial number is provided on the metal tag that is attached to the sensor case.
b) Set Sensor Material to the material used for the sensor.
c) Set Sensor Liner to the material used for the sensor liner, if any.
d) Set Flange Type to the type of flange that was used to install the sensor.
Sensor Type is set or derived during characterization.
2.8 Characterize the meter (if required)
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Sensor Parameters
Device Tools → Calibration Data
Configuration → Sensor Parameters
12 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Quick start
November 2022
Characterizing the meter adjusts your transmitter to match the unique traits of the sensor it is paired with.
The characterization parameters (also called calibration parameters) describe the sensor’s sensitivity to flow, density, and temperature. Depending on your sensor type, different parameters are required.
Values for your sensor are provided on the sensor tag or the calibration certificate.
• If your transmitter was ordered with a sensor, it was characterized at the factory. However, you should still verify the characterization parameters.
• Perform a characterization whenever you replace a core processor.
Note
If the transmitter and sensor are purchased together, you do not need to characterize the meter because this step was performed at the factory prior to shipping.
Note
The 1600 derives Sensor Type from the user-specified values for FCF and K1.
Procedure
1. Set the flow calibration factor: FCF (also called Flow Cal or Flow Calibration Factor ). Be sure to include both decimal points and all zeros.
2. Set the density characterization parameters: D1 , D2 , TC , K1 , K2 , and FD . ( TC is sometimes shown as
DT .)
3. Apply the changes as required by the tool you are using.
The transmitter identifies your sensor type, and characterization parameters are adjusted as required:
• If Sensor Type changed from Curved Tube to Straight Tube, five characterization parameters are added to the list.
• If Sensor Type changed from Straight Tube to Curved Tube, five characterization parameters are removed from the list.
• If Sensor Type did not change, the list of characterization parameters does not change.
4. T-Series sensors only: Set the additional characterization parameters listed below.
Characterization parameter type
Flow
Density
Parameters
FTG , FFQ
DTG , DFQ1 , DFQ2
Configuration and Use Manual 13
Quick start
November 2022
2.8.1 Sample sensor tags
Figure 2-1: Tag on newer curved-tube sensors (all sensors except T-Series)
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2.8.2 Flow calibration parameters (FCF, FT)
Two separate values are used to describe flow calibration: a 6-character FCF value and a 4-character FT value.
They are provided on the sensor tag.
Both values contain decimal points. During characterization, these are entered as a single 10-character string.
The 10-character string is called either Flowcal or FCF .
If your sensor tag shows the FCF and the FT values separately and you need to enter a single value, concatenate the two values to form the single parameter value, retaining both decimal points.
Concatenating FCF and FT
FCF = x.xxxx FT = y.yy Flow calibration parameter: x.xxxxy.yy
2.8.3 Density calibration parameters (D1, D2, K1, K2, FD, DT, TC)
Density calibration parameters are typically on the sensor tag and the calibration certificate.
If your sensor tag does not show a D1 or D2 value:
• For D1 , enter the Dens A or D1 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density of the low-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses air. If you cannot find a Dens A or D1 value, enter 0.001
g/cm 3 .
• For D2 , enter the Dens B or D2 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density of the high-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses water. If you cannot find a Dens B or D2 value, enter 0.998
g/cm 3 .
If your sensor tag does not show a K1 or K2 value:
• For K1 , enter the first five digits of the density calibration factor. In this sample tag, this value is shown as
12500.
• For K2 , enter the second five digits of the density calibration factor. In this sample tag, this value is shown as 14286.
14 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Figure 2-2: K1, K2, and TC values in the density calibration factor
Quick start
November 2022
If your sensor does not show an FD value, contact customer service.
If your sensor tag does not show a DT or TC value, enter the last four characters of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag shown above, the value is shown as 4.44.
Do not confuse the Meter Factor line on the pictured sensor tag with any meter factor settings discussed in this manual.
2.9 Verify mass flow measurement
Check to see that the mass flow rate reported by the transmitter is accurate. You can use any available method.
Procedure
• Read the value for Mass Flow Rate on the transmitter display.
• Connect to the transmitter with ProLink III and read the value for Mass Flow Rate in the Process Variables panel.
Postrequisites
If the reported mass flow rate is not accurate:
• Check the characterization parameters.
• Review the troubleshooting suggestions for flow measurement issues.
For information about modifying these values, refer to Configure mass flow measurement
.
2.10 Verify the zero
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Service Tools → Verification & Calibration → Meter Zero → Zero Verification
Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Verify Zero
Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Meter Zero → Zero Verification
Configuration and Use Manual 15
Quick start
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Verifying the zero helps you determine if the stored zero value is appropriate to your installation, or if a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the meter unless one of the following is true:
• The zero is required by site procedures.
• The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
Procedure
1. Prepare the meter: a) Allow the meter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b) Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c) Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d) Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
2. Start the zero verification procedure, and wait until it completes.
3. If the zero verification procedure fails: a) Confirm that the sensor is completely blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
b) Verify that the process fluid is not flashing or condensing, and that it does not contain particles that can settle out.
c) Repeat the zero verification procedure.
d) If it fails again, zero the meter.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
Related information
16 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022
3 Introduction to configuration and commissioning
3.1 Security and write protection
The transmitter has several features that can help to protect it against intentional or unintentional access and configuration changes.
• When locked, the mechanical lock switch on the front of the upper puck prevents any configuration changes to the transmitter from any local or remote configuration tool.
• When enabled, the software setting Write Protection prevents any configuration changes. The setting can only be enabled if the transmitter does not have a display.
• If the Universal Service Port (USP) is disabled, the port cannot be used by any service tool to communicate with or make changes to the transmitter.
• When enabled, Security prevents any configuration changes being made from the display unless the appropriate password is entered.
3.1.1 Web server security
You can configure this transmitter using web services. There are multiple levels of security built into the transmitter that you can configure according to your needs and security standards, including:
• Disabling the web servers
• Allowing downloads of configuration and historian files, but disallowing file uploads to the transmitter through the Ethernet interface
• Configuring Transport Layer Security (TLS) on the web server to encrypt all data transmitted between the web server and the transmitter
• Requiring user authentication and strong passwords to access the web server and the transmitter
• Notifying users through alerts if the default password has not been changed
• Disallowing configuration changes from all interfaces including the Ethernet port using transmitter security switches, such as the lock switch or write protection
This transmitter:
• Was designed to be implemented in an industrial automation control system (Level 1 and Level 2 of the
Purdue Reference Architecture Model), with defense in depth security controls.
• Is not intended to be directly connected to an enterprise or to an internet-facing network without a compensating control in place.
3.1.2 Enable or disable the service port
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Security → Service Port
Not available
Not available
Configuration and Use Manual 17
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
The service port is enabled by default. You can use the service port for connecting to ProLink III and for transferring files. If you want to completely prevent it from being used, you can disable it.
Note
Enabling or disabling the service port will not take effect until power has been cycled to the transmitter.
WARNING
Do not use the service port if the transmitter is in a hazardous area because using the service port means that you must open the transmitter wiring compartment. Opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous area while the transmitter is powered up can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
3.1.3 Enable or disable write-protection
Upper puck
ProLink III
Web browser
Use the mechanical switch on the upper puck.
Not available
Not available
When enabled, Write-Protection prevents changes to the transmitter configuration. You can perform all other functions, and you can view the transmitter configuration parameters.
Note
Write protection is available only by removing the display in order to access the upper puck component and using the lock switch to set the switch ON.
Figure 3-1: Removing the transmitter housing cover
18
A. Display Component
B. Upper Puck Component
Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
Figure 3-2: Setting Switch 1 ON (to the left) to Set Write-Protection
November 2022
A. Switch 1
Write-protecting the transmitter primarily prevents accidental changes to configuration, not intentional changes. Any user who can make changes to the configuration can disable write protection.
3.1.4 Configure security for the display
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Not available
Configuration and Use Manual 19
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
When using the display, you can require users to enter a password to do any of the following tasks:
• Enter the main menu
• Change a parameter
• Access alert data through the display
• Start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories via the context menu
The display password can be the same or different from the totalizer/inventory context menu control password. If different, the display password is used to reset, start, and stop totalizers or inventories using
Menu → Operations → Totalizers .
Procedure
1. Configure Password Required as desired.
Option
At Write
Enter Menu
Description
When an user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are prompted to enter the display password.
When the menu is selected from the process variable screen, the display password will be immediately required if Password Required is set.
Never (default) When a user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are prompted to activate ⇦⇧⇩⇨ . This is designed to protect against accidental changes to configuration. It is not a security measure.
2. If the At Write or Enter Menu option was selected, enable or disable alert security as desired.
Option Description
Enabled If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display but the alert banner is not displayed. If the operator attempts to enter the alert menu, they are prompted to enter the display password.
Disabled If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display and the alert banner is displayed automatically. No password or confirmation is required to enter the alert menu.
Restriction
You cannot set Password Required to Never and enable alert security.
• If you did not enable Password Required , alert security is disabled and cannot be enabled.
• Alert security is disabled automatically if you set Password Required to Never after:
— Password Required is initially set to either At Write or Enter Menu
— Alert security is enabled
20 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022
3. If Password Required has been set to At Write or Enter Menu, you will be prompted to enter the desired password.
• Default: AAAA
• Range: Any four alphanumeric characters
• Password Required must be set to At Write or Enter Menu to enable the totalizer/inventory control context menu password option.
Important
If you enable Password Required but you do not change the display password, the transmitter will post a configuration alert.
4. Configure Main Menu Available as desired.
Option Description
Enabled The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will be accessible.
Disabled The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will not be accessible.
Important
Once Main Menu Available has been disabled, you cannot enable it from the local display. Use another configuration tool, such as ProLink III, to re-enable main menu access from the local display.
3.2 Work with configuration files
You can save the current transmitter configuration in two forms: a backup file and a replication file.
Tip
You can use a saved configuration file to change the nature of the transmitter quickly. This might be convenient if the transmitter is used for different applications or different process fluids.
Backup files Contain all parameters. They are used to restore the current device if required.
The .spare
extension is used to identify backup files.
Replication files Contain all parameters except the device-specific parameters, e.g., calibration factors or meter factors. They are used to replicate the transmitter configuration to other devices.
The .xfer
extension is used to identify replication files.
Configuration and Use Manual 21
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
3.2.1 Save a configuration file using the display
Procedure
• To save the current configuration to the transmitter's internal memory: a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Save/Restore Config → Save Config to Memory .
b) When prompted to load 1600 device configuration data from a file, click the on my 1600 device internal memory radio button.
c) Enter the name for this configuration file.
The configuration file is saved to internal memory as yourname .spare
.
3.2.2 Save a configuration file using ProLink III
Note
When you use ProLink III format for configuration files, you can specify configuration parameters individually or by groups. Therefore, you can use this format for both backup and replication.
Prerequisites
If you are planning to use the USP (Universal Service Port)), the port must be enabled. It is enabled by default.
However, if you need to enable or disable it using the display, choose Menu → Configuration → Security and set Service Port to On.
Procedure
• To save the current configuration to your PC, in 1600 format: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Save Configuration .
b) Select On my computer in 1600 device file format and click Next .
c) Select Save .
d) Browse to the desired location, then enter the name for this configuration file.
e) Set the file type.
— To save a backup file, set the file type to Backup.
— To save a replication file, set the file type to Transfer.
f) Select Save .
The configuration file is saved to the specified location as yourname .spare
or yourname .xfer
.
• To save the current configuration to your PC, in ProLink III format: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Save Configuration .
b) Select On my computer in ProLink III file format and click Next .
c) Select Save .
22 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022 d) Select the configuration parameters to be included in this file.
— To save a backup file, select all parameters.
— To save a replication file, select all parameters except device-specific parameters.
e) Select Save.
f) Browse to the desired location, then enter the name for this configuration file.
g) Set the file type to ProLink configuration file.
h) Select Start Save.
The configuration file is saved to the specified location as yourname .pcfg
.
3.2.3 Load a configuration file using the display
Prerequisites
You must have a backup file or a replication file available for use in internal memory.
Procedure
• To load a configuration file to the transmitter's internal memory: a) Make sure the configuration file is in the Config folder.
b) Upload the configuration file through the USP file by specifying Device Tools → Configuration
Transfer → Load Configuration .
c) When prompted to load 1600 device configuration data from a file, click the on my 1600 device internal memory radio button.
d) Choose Backup and click Restore .
The configuration file is loaded to internal memory as yourname .spare
.
3.2.4 Load a configuration file using ProLink III
You can load a configuration file to a transmitter's internal memory, as well as loading a backup file or a replication file. Two PC file formats are supported: the 1600 format and the ProLink III format.
Note
When you use ProLink III format for configuration files, you can specify configuration parameters individually or by groups. Therefore, you can use this format for both backup and replication.
Procedure
• To load a backup file or replication file in 1600 format from the PC: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Load Configuration .
b) Select On my computer in 1600 device file format and select Next .
c) Select Restore.
Configuration and Use Manual 23
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600 d) Set the file type.
— To load a backup file, set the file type to Backup.
— To load a replication file, set the file type to Transfer.
e) Navigate to the file you want to load, and select it.
The parameters are written to the internal memory, and the new settings become effectively immediately.
• To load a file in ProLink III format from the PC: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Load Configuration .
b) Select On my computer in ProLink III file format and select Next .
c) Select the parameters that you want to load.
d) Select Load.
e) Set the file type to Configuration file.
f) Navigate to the file you want to load, and select it.
g) Select Start Load.
The parameters are written to the internal memory, and the new settings become effectively immediately.
3.2.5 Replicate a transmitter configuration
Replicating a transmitter configuration is a fast method to set up similar or identical measurement points.
Procedure
1. Configure a transmitter and verify its operation and performance.
2. Use any available method to save a replication file from that transmitter.
3. Use any available method to load the replication file to another transmitter.
4. At the replicated transmitter, set device-specific parameters and perform device-specific procedures: a) Set the clock.
b) Set the tag, long tag, IP address, and related parameters.
c) Characterize the transmitter.
d) Perform zero validation and take any recommended actions.
e) Perform loop tests and take any recommended actions, including mA Output trim.
f) Use sensor simulation to verify transmitter response.
5. At the replicated transmitter, make any other configuration changes.
6. Follow your standard procedures to ensure that the replicated transmitter is performing as desired.
24 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
4 Configure process measurement
4.1 Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Flow Direction
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Sensor Direction
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Sensor Direction
Sensor Flow Direction Arrow is used to accommodate installations in which the Flow arrow on the sensor does not match the majority of the process flow. This typically happens when the sensor is either accidentally installed backwards or conditions require that it be installed backwards.
Sensor Flow Direction Arrow interacts with mA Output Direction , Frequency Output Direction , and
Totalizer Direction to control how flow is reported by the outputs and accumulated by the totalizers and inventories.
The Sensor Flow Direction Arrow also affects how flow is reported on the transmitter display and via digital communications. This includes ProLink III, the web browser, and all other user interfaces.
Figure 4-1: Flow arrow on sensor
A. Flow arrow
B. Actual flow direction
Procedure
Set Sensor Flow Direction Arrow as appropriate.
Option Description
With Arrow The majority of flow through the sensor matches the Flow arrow on the sensor. Actual forward flow is processed as forward flow.
Against Arrow The majority of flow through the sensor is opposite to the Flow arrow on the sensor. Actual forward flow is processed as reverse flow.
Configuration and Use Manual 25
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Tip
Micro Motion sensors are bidirectional. Measurement accuracy is not affected by actual flow direction or the setting of Sensor Flow Direction Arrow . Sensor Flow Direction Arrow controls only whether actual flow is processed as forward flow or reverse flow.
Related information
Configure Frequency Output Direction
Configure Discrete Output Source
Configure totalizers and inventories
Effect of Sensor Flow Direction Arrow on digital communications
4.2 Configure mass flow measurement
The mass flow measurement parameters control how mass flow is measured and reported. The mass total and mass inventory are derived from the mass flow data.
4.2.1 Configure Mass Flow Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Rate Unit
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Rate Unit
Mass Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be used for the mass flow rate. The default unit used for mass total and mass inventory is derived from this unit.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
Default: g/sec (grams per second)
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Mass Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Mass Flow Measurement Unit , plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Grams per second
Grams per minute
Grams per hour
Kilograms per second
Display gram/s gram/min gram/h kg/s
ProLink III
Label g/sec g/min g/hr kg/sec
Web browser g/sec g/min g/hr kg/sec
26 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Unit description
Kilograms per minute
Kilograms per hour
Kilograms per day
Metric tons per minute
Metric tons per hour
Metric tons per day
Pounds per second
Pounds per minute
Pounds per hour
Pounds per day
Display kg/min kg/h kg/d
MetTon/min
MetTon/h
MetTon/d lb/s lb/min lb/h lb/d
Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute STon/min
Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour STon/h
Short tons (2000 pounds) per day
Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour
STon/d
LTon/h
Long tons (2240 pounds) per day
Special unit
LTon/d
SPECIAL lbs/sec lbs/min lbs/hr lbs/day sTon/min sTon/hr sTon/day lTon/hr lTon/day
Special
ProLink III
Label kg/min kg/hr kg/day mTon/min mTon/hr mTon/day
Web browser kg/min kg/hr kg/day mTon/min mTon/hr mTon/day lbs/sec lbs/min lbs/hr lbs/day sTon/min sTon/hr sTon/day lTon/hr lTon/day
Special
Define a special measurement unit for mass flow
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Units →
SPECIAL
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Rate Unit → Special
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Rate Unit → Special
Procedure
1. Specify Base Mass Unit .
Base Mass Unit is the existing mass unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit .
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a) x base units = y special units b) Mass Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter Mass Flow Conversion Factor .
The original mass flow rate value is divided by this value.
Configuration and Use Manual 27
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
5. Set Mass Flow Label to the name you want to use for the mass flow unit.
6. Set Mass Total Label to the name you want to use for the mass total and mass inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for mass flow
If you want to measure mass flow in ounces per second (oz/sec):
1. Set Base Mass Unit to Pounds (lb).
2. Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3. Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor : a. 1 lb/sec = 16 oz/sec b.
Mass Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 16 = 0.0625
4. Set Mass Flow Conversion Factor to 0.0625
.
5. Set Mass Flow Label to oz/sec .
6. Set Mass Total Label to oz .
4.2.2 Configure Flow Damping
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Flow Damping
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Flow Rate Damping
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Flow Rate Damping
Flow Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the measured mass flow rate. It affects flow rate process variables that are based on the measured mass flow rate. This includes volume flow rate and gas standard volume flow rate.
Flow Damping also affects specialized flow rate variables such as temperature-corrected volume flow rate
(API Referral) and net mass flow rate (concentration measurement).
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the internal value of the process variable (the damped value) will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Flow Damping to the value you want to use.
• Default: 0.64 seconds
• Range: 0 seconds to 60 seconds
Note
If a number greater than 60 is entered, it is automatically changed to 60.
28 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in flow rate can result in increased measurement error.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement because the reported value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the reported value.
• The transmitter automatically rounds off any entered damping value to the nearest valid value. Therefore, the recommended damping value for gas applications should be 3.2 seconds. If you enter 2.56, the transmitter will round it off to 3.2.
• For filling applications, Emerson recommends using the default value of 0.04 seconds.
Effect of flow damping on volume measurement
Flow damping affects volume measurement for liquid volume data. Flow damping also affects volume measurement for gas standard volume data. The transmitter calculates volume data from the damped mass flow data.
Interaction between Flow Damping and mA Output Damping
In some circumstances, both Flow Damping and mA Output Damping are applied to the reported mass flow value.
Flow Damping controls the rate of change in flow process variables. mA Output Damping controls the rate of change reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, and both
Flow Damping and mA Output Damping are set to non-zero values, flow damping is applied first, and the added damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation.
4.2.3 Configure Mass Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Low Flow
Cutoff
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest mass flow rate that will be reported as measured. All mass flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
• Default: A sensor-specific value set at the factory. If your transmitter was ordered without a sensor, the default may be 0.0.
Configuration and Use Manual 29
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• Recommendation: 0.5% of maximum flow rate of the attached sensor. See the sensor specifications.
Important
Do not use your meter for measurement with Mass Flow Cutoff set to 0.0 g/sec. Ensure that Mass Flow
Cutoff is set to the value that is appropriate for your sensor.
Effect of Mass Flow Cutoff on volume measurement
Mass Flow Cutoff does not affect volume measurement. Volume data is calculated from the actual mass data rather than the reported value.
Volume flow has a separate Volume Flow Cutoff that is not affected by the Mass Flow Cutoff value.
Interaction between Mass Flow Cutoff and mA Output Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff defines the lowest mass flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mA Output Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output. If mA Output
Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, the mass flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Mass Flow Cutoff affects all reported values and values used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events defined on mass flow).
mA Output Cutoff affects only mass flow values reported through mA Output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff lower than Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff : 10 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff : 15 g/sec
Result: If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec, mass flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff higher than Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff : 15 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff : 10 g/sec
Result:
• If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec but not below 10 g/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
30 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
• If the mass flow rate drops below 10 g/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
4.3 Configure volume flow measurement for liquid applications
The volume flow measurement parameters control how liquid volume flow is measured and reported. The volume total and volume inventory are derived from volume flow data.
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. Choose one or the other.
4.3.1 Configure Volume Flow Type for liquid applications
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Flow
Type → Liquid
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Type → Liquid Volume
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Type → Liquid Volume
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement will be used.
Restriction
Gas standard volume measurement is incompatible with the following applications:
• API Referral
• Concentration measurement
• Advanced Phase Measurement — liquid with gas
For these applications, set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
4.3.2 Configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Rate Unit
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Rate Unit
Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measurement that will be displayed for the volume flow rate. The unit used for the volume total and volume inventory is based on this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit , be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid.
Configuration and Use Manual 31
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
Default: l/sec (liters per second)
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Volume Flow Measurement Unit , plus one user-defined measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Cubic feet per second
Cubic feet per minute
Cubic feet per hour
Cubic feet per day
Cubic meters per second
Cubic meters per minute
Cubic meters per hour
Cubic meters per day
U.S. gallons per second
U.S. gallons per minute
U.S. gallons per hour
U.S. gallons per day
Million U.S. gallons per day
Liters per second
Liters per minute
Liters per hour
Million liters per day
Imperial gallons per second
Imperial gallons per minute
Imperial gallons per hour
Imperial gallons per day
Barrels per second
Barrels per minute
Barrels per day
m3/d gal/s gal/m gal/h gal/d
MMgal/d
L/s
L/min
Display ft3/s ft3/min ft3/h ft3/d m3/s m3/min m3/h
L/h
MML/d
Impgal/s
Impgal/m
Impgal/h
Impgal/d bbl/s bbl/min bbl/h bbl/d
ProLink III
Label ft3/sec ft3/min ft3/hr ft3/day m3/sec m3/min m3/hr m3/day
US gal/sec
US gal/min
US gal/hr
US gal/day mil US gal/day l/sec l/min l/hr mil l/day
Imp gal/sec
Imp gal/min
Imp gal/hr
Imp gal/day barrels/sec barrels/min barrels/hr barrels/day l/hr mil l/day
Imp gal/sec
Imp gal/min
Imp gal/hr
Imp gal/day barrels/sec barrels/min barrels/hr barrels/day
Web browser ft3/sec ft3/min ft3/hr ft3/day m3/sec m3/min m3/hr m3/day
US gal/sec
US gal/min
US gal/hr
US gal/day mil US gal/day l/sec l/min
32 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Unit description
Beer barrels per second
Beer barrels per minute
Beer barrels per day
Special unit
Display
Beer bbl/s
Beer bbl/min
Beer bbl/h
Beer bbl/d
SPECIAL
(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).
(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).
ProLink III
Label
Beer barrels/sec
Beer barrels/min
Beer barrels/hr
Beer barrels/day
Special
Web browser
Beer barrels/sec
Beer barrels/min
Beer barrels/hr
Beer barrels/day
Special
Define a special measurement unit for volume flow
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Units →
SPECIAL
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Rate Unit → Special
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Rate Unit → Special
Procedure
1. Specify Base Volume Unit .
Base Volume Unit is the existing volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit .
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a) x base units = y special units b) Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter Volume Flow Conversion Factor .
The original volume flow rate value is divided by this conversion factor.
5. Set Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the volume flow unit.
6. Set Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the volume total and volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for volume flow
You want to measure volume flow in pints per second (pints/sec).
1. Set Base Volume Unit to Gallons (gal).
2. Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
Configuration and Use Manual 33
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
3. Calculate the conversion factor: a. 1 gal/sec = 8 pints/sec b.
Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 8 = 0.1250
4. Set Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.1250
.
5. Set Volume Flow Label to pints/sec .
6. Set Volume Total Label to pints .
4.3.3 Configure Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Low Flow
Cutoff
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Cutoff
Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest volume flow rate that will be reported as measured. All volume flow rates below this cutoff are reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
• Default: 0.0 l/sec (liters per second)
• Range: 0 l/sec to x l/sec, where x is the sensor’s flow calibration factor, multiplied by 0.0002
Interaction between Volume Flow Cutoff and mAO Cutoff
Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest liquid volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mAO Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process
Variable is set to Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the volume flow values reported via the outputs and the volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events defined on the volume flow).
mAO Cutoff affects only flow values reported through mA Output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mAO Cutoff lower than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff : 10 l/sec
• Volume Flow Cutoff : 15 l/sec
Result: If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec, volume flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
34 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Example: Cutoff interaction with mAO Cutoff higher than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff : 15 l/sec
• Volume Flow Cutoff : 10 l/sec
Result:
• If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec but not below 10 l/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the volume flow rate drops below 10 l/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
4.4 Configure Gas Standard Volume (GSV) flow measurement
The gas standard volume (GSV) flow measurement parameters control how gas standard volume flow is measured and reported.
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. Choose one or the other.
4.4.1 Configure Volume Flow Type for gas applications
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Flow Type →
Gas
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Type → Gas Standard
Volume
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Type → Gas Standard Volume
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement will be used.
Restriction
Gas standard volume measurement is incompatible with the following applications:
• API Referral
• Concentration measurement
• Advanced Phase Measurement — liquid with gas
For these applications, set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
Configuration and Use Manual 35
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Gas.
4.4.2 Configure Standard Gas Density
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Standard
Gas Density
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Standard Density of Gas
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Standard Density of Gas
Standard Gas Density is the density of your gas at reference temperature and reference pressure. This is often called standard density or base density . It is used to calculate the GSV flow rate from the mass flow rate.
Procedure
Set Standard Gas Density to the density of your gas at reference temperature and reference pressure.
You can use any reference temperature and reference pressure that you choose. It is not necessary to configure these values in the transmitter.
Tip
ProLink III provides a guided method that you can use to calculate the standard density of your gas if you do not know it.
4.4.3 Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit
Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be used for the gas standard volume (GSV) flow rate. The unit used for gas standard volume total and gas standard volume inventory is derived from this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit , be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to Gas Standard Volume.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
Default: SCFM (Standard Cubic Feet per Minute)
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
36 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Options for Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement
Unit , plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Normal cubic meters per second
Normal cubic meters per minute
Normal cubic meters per hour
Normal cubic meters per day
Normal liter per second
Normal liter per minute
Normal liter per hour
Normal liter per day
Standard cubic feet per second
Standard cubic feet per minute
Standard cubic feet per hour
Standard cubic feet per day
Standard cubic meters per second
Standard cubic meters per minute
Standard cubic meters per hour
Standard cubic meters per day
Standard liter per second
Standard liter per minute
Standard liter per hour
Standard liter per day
Special measurement unit
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
SCMS
SCMM
SCMH
Display
NCMS
NCMM
NCMH
NCMD
NLPS
NLPM
NLPH
SCMD
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD
SPECIAL
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/sec
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
ProLink III
Label
Nm3/sec
Nm3/min
Nm3/hr
Nm3/day
NLPS
NLPM
Sm3/day
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD
Special
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/sec
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
Web browser
Nm3/sec
Nm3/min
Nm3/hr
Nm3/day
NLPS
NLPM
NLPH
Sm3/day
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD
Special
Define a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Units →
SPECIAL
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit →
Special
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit → Special
Configuration and Use Manual 37
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Procedure
1. Specify Base Gas Standard Volume Unit .
Base Gas Standard Volume Unit is the existing gas standard volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit .
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a) x base units = y special units b) Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter the Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor .
The original gas standard volume flow value is divided by this conversion factor.
5. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume flow unit.
6. Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume total and gas standard volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
You want to measure gas standard volume flow in thousands of standard cubic feet per minute.
1. Set Base Gas Standard Volume Unit to SCFM.
2. Set Base Time Unit to minutes (min).
3. Calculate the conversion factor: a. One thousands of standard cubic feet per minute = 1000 cubic feet per minute b.
Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 1000 = 0.001
4. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.001
.
5. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to KSCFM .
6. Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to KSCF .
4.4.4 Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Low Flow
Cutoff
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
38 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest gas standard volume flow rate that will reported as measured. All gas standard volume flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
• Default: 0.0
• Range: 0.0 to any positive value
Interaction between Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff and mA Output
Cutoff
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest Gas Standard Volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mA Output Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output.
If mA Output Process Variable is set to Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the gas standard volume flow values reported through outputs and the gas standard volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior (for example, events defined on gas standard volume flow).
mA Output Cutoff affects only flow values reported through mA Output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff lower than Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff for the primary mA Output: 10 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
• Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff : 15 SLPM
Result: If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 15 SLPM, the volume flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff higher than Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff for the primary mA Output: 15 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
• Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff : 10 SLPM
Result:
• If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 15 SLPM but not below 10 SLPM:
Configuration and Use Manual 39
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
— The primary mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 10 SLPM, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
4.5 Configure density measurement
The density measurement parameters control how density is measured and reported. Density measurement is used with mass flow rate measurement to determine liquid volume flow rate.
4.5.1 Configure Density Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Unit
Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Unit
Density Measurement Unit controls the measurement units that will be used in density calculations and reporting.
Restriction
If the API Referral application is enabled, you cannot change the density measurement unit here. The density measurement unit is controlled by the API table selection.
Procedure
Set Density Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
Default: g/cm 3 (grams per cubic centimeter)
Options for Density Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Density Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels.
Unit description
Grams per cubic centimeter
Grams per liter
Grams per milliliter
Kilograms per liter
Kilograms per cubic meter
Pounds per U.S. gallon
Pounds per cubic foot
Display
SGU g/cm3 g/L g/mL kg/L kg/m3 lb/gal lb/ft3
ProLink III
Label
SGU g/cm3 g/l g/ml kg/l kg/m3 lbs/USgal lbs/ft3
Web browser
SGU g/cm3 g/l g/ml kg/l kg/m3 lb/USgal lb/ft3
40 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Unit description
Pounds per cubic inch
Degrees API
Short ton per cubic yard
Display lb/in3
API
STon/yd3
ProLink III
Label lbs/in3
API sT/yd3
Web browser lb/in3
°API
ST/yd3
(1) Non-standard calculation. This value represents line density divided by the density of water at 60 °F (15.6 °C).
4.5.2 Configure Density Damping
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Damping
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Damping
Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Damping
Density Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to density data.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the internal value of the process variable (the damped value) will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Density Damping to the desired value.
• Default: 1.28 seconds
• Range: 0.0 to 60 seconds
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in density can result in increased measurement error.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the damped value will lag the actual measurement because the damped value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the damped value.
• If a number greater than 60 is entered, it is automatically changed to 60.
Configuration and Use Manual 41
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Effect of Density Damping on volume measurement
Density Damping affects liquid volume measurement. Liquid volume values are calculated from the damped density value rather than the measured density value. Density Damping does not affect gas standard volume measurement.
Interaction between Density Damping and mA Output Damping
When mA Output is configured to report density, both Density Damping and mA Output Damping are applied to the reported density value.
Density Damping controls the rate of change in the value of the process variable in transmitter memory.
mA Output Damping controls the rate of change reported through mA Output.
If mA Output Source is set to Density, and both Density Damping and mA Output Damping are set to nonzero values, density damping is applied first, and the mA Output damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation. This value is reported over mA Output.
4.5.3 Configure Density Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Cutoff
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Cutoff
Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Cutoff
Density Cutoff specifies the lowest density value that will be reported as measured. All density values below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Density Cutoff to the value you want to use.
• Default: 0.2 g/cm 3
• Range: 0.0 g/cm 3 to 0.5 g/cm 3
Effect of Density Cutoff on volume measurement
Density Cutoff affects liquid volume measurement. If the density value goes below Density Cutoff , the volume flow rate is reported as 0.
4.6 Configure temperature measurement
The temperature measurement parameters control how temperature data is processed. Temperature data is used in several different ways, including temperature compensation, API Referral, and concentration measurement.
4.6.1 Configure Temperature Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Temperature Unit
42 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Web browser Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Temperature Unit
Temperature Measurement Unit specifies the unit that will be used for temperature measurement.
Procedure
Set Temperature Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
Default: °C (Celsius)
Options for Temperature Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of units for Temperature Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit
Degrees Rankine
Kelvin
°F
°R
Display
°C
°K
°R
°K
°C
°F
ProLink III
Label
°F
°R
Web browser
°C
°K
4.6.2 Configure Temperature Damping
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Damping
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Temperature Damping
Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Temperature Damping
Temperature Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to temperature data from the sensor. Temperature Damping is not applied to external temperature data.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the internal value of the process variable (the damped value) will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Temperature Damping to the desired value.
• Default: 4.8 seconds
• Range: 0.0 to 80 seconds
Note
If a number greater than 80 is entered, it is automatically changed to 80.
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
Configuration and Use Manual 43
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in temperature can result in increased measurement error.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the damped value will lag the actual measurement because the damped value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the damped value.
Effect of Temperature Damping on process measurement
Temperature Damping affects all processes and algorithms that use temperature data from the internal sensor RTD.
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation adjusts process measurement to compensate for the effect of temperature on the sensor tubes.
API Referral
Temperature Damping affects API Referral process variables only if the transmitter is configured to use temperature data from the sensor. If an external temperature value is used for API Referral, Temperature
Damping does not affect API Referral process variables.
Concentration measurement
Temperature Damping affects concentration measurement process variables only if the transmitter is configured to use temperature data from the sensor. If an external temperature value is used for concentration measurement, Temperature Damping does not affect concentration measurement process variables.
4.7 Configure Pressure Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure Compensation → Pressure Unit
Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure → Pressure Unit
Pressure Measurement Unit controls the measurement unit used for pressure. This unit must match the unit used by the external pressure device.
Pressure data is used for pressure compensation and for API Referral. The device does not measure pressure directly. You must set up a pressure input.
Procedure
Set Pressure Measurement Unit to the desired unit.
Default: psi
44 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement
November 2022
4.7.1 Options for Pressure Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Pressure Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels for the units. In most applications, set Pressure Measurement
Unit to match the pressure measurement unit used by the remote device.
Unit description
Feet water @ 68 °F
Inches water @ 4 °C
Inches water @ 60 °F
Inches water @ 68 °F
Millimeters water @ 4 °C
Millimeters water @ 68 °F
Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C
Inches mercury @ 0 °C
Pounds per square inch
Bar
Millibar
Grams per square centimeter
Kilograms per square centimeter
Pascals
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Torr @ 0 °C
Atmospheres kPA mPA torr atm
Display ftH2O @68°F inH2O @4°C inH2O @60°F inH2O @68°F mmH2O @4°C mmH2O @68°F mmHg @0°C inHg @0°C psi bar mbar g/cm2 kg/cm2
Pa
ProLink III
Label
Ft Water @ 68°F
In Water @ 4°C
In Water @ 60°F
In Water @ 68°F mm Water @ 4°C mm Water @ 68°F mm Mercury @ 0°C
In Mercury @ 0°C
PSI bar millibar g/cm2 kg/cm2 pascals
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Torr @ 0°C atms
Web browser
Ft Water @68°F
Not applicable
Not applicable
In Water @68°F
Not applicable mm Water @68°F mm Mercury @0°C
In Mercury @0°C
PSI bar millibar g/cm2 kg/cm2 pascals
Kilopascals
Not applicable
Torr @0°C atms
4.8 Configure Velocity Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Velocity → Units
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Velocity → Unit
Configuration → Process Measurement → Velocity → Unit
Velocity Measurement Unit controls the measurement unit used to report velocity.
Procedure
Set Velocity Measurement Unit to the desired unit.
Default: m/sec
Configuration and Use Manual 45
Configure process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
4.8.1 Options for Velocity Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Velocity Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels.
Unit description
Feet per minute
Feet per second
Inches per minute
Inches per second
Meters per hour
Meters per second
Display ft/min ft/s in/min in/s m/h m/s
ProLink III ft/min
Label ft/sec in/min in/sec m/hr m/sec
Web browser ft/min ft/s in/min in/s m/h m/s
46 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
5 Configure process measurement applications
5.1 Set up the API Referral application
The API Referral application corrects line density to reference temperature and reference pressure according to American Petroleum Institute (API) standards. The resulting process variable is referred density .
Restriction
The API Referral application is not compatible with the following applications:
• Gas Standard Volume Measurement (GSV)
• Advanced Phase Measurement
• Concentration measurement
5.1.1 Set up the API Referral application using the display
Enable the API Referral application using the display
The API Referral application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the API Referral application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The API Referral application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement .
2. Choose Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings and ensure that Flow Type is set to Liquid.
3. Return to the Process Measurement menu.
4. If the concentration measurement application is displayed in the list, choose Concentration
Measurement and ensure that Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled simultaneously.
5. Enable API Referral.
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral .
b) Set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled.
Configuration and Use Manual 47
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure API Referral using the display
The API Referral parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
You must know the reference temperature and reference pressure that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configure → Process Measurement → API Referral .
2. Set API Table to the API table that you want to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations. Choose your API table based on your process fluid and the measurement unit that you want to use for referred density.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTPL or CTL).
3. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line pressure.
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
Acceptable limits:
• 230.0 x 10 -6 to 930.0 x 10 -6 per °F
• 414.0 x 10 -6 to 1674.0 x 10 -6 per °C
5. If required, set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations.
The default reference temperature is determined by the selected API table.
6. If required, set Reference Pressure to the pressure to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations.
The default reference pressure is determined by the selected API table.
Set up temperature and pressure data for API Referral using the display
The API Referral application uses temperature and, optionally, pressure data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Note
Fixed values for temperature or pressure are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature or pressure value may produce inaccurate process data.
48 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Prerequisites
The pressure measurement must be gauge pressure, not atmospheric pressure.
The pressure device must use the pressure unit that is configured in the transmitter.
If you are using an external temperature device, it must use the temperature unit that is configured in the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Internal temperature
Description
Temperature data from the on-board temperature sensor
(RTD) will be used for all measurements and calculations. No external temperature data will be available.
Digital communications
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
This data will be available in addition to the internal temperature data.
Setup a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature .
b. Set External Temperature to Off.
a. Choose b. Set
Menu
Temperature .
→ Configuration
External Temperature
→
to On.
Process Measurement → c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
2. Choose the method to be used to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Digital communications
Description
A host writes pressure data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Setup a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure
→ External Pressure .
b. Set External Pressure to On.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
Choose Menu → Service Tools → Service Data → View Process Variables and verify the values for External
Temperature and External Pressure.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
• For digital communications, verify that the host has access to the required data.
Configuration and Use Manual 49
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
5.1.2 Set up the API Referral application using ProLink III
Enable the API Referral application using ProLink III
Prerequisites
The API Referral application must be licensed and enabled on your transmitter before you can perform any setup. If the API Referral application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow and ensure that Volume
Flow Type is set to Liquid Volume.
2. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Options .
3. If the concentration measurement application is enabled, disable it and select Apply .
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled simultaneously.
4. Enable API Referral and select Apply .
Configure API Referral using ProLink III
The API Referral parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
You must know the reference temperature and reference pressure that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral .
2. Specify the API table to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations.
a) Set Process Fluid to the API table group that your process fluid belongs to.
API table group
A tables
B tables
C tables
D tables
E tables
Process fluids
Generalized crude and JP4
Generalized products: Gasoline, jet fuel, aviation fuel, kerosene, heating oils, fuel oils, diesel, gas oil
Liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion coefficient (TEC).
You will be required to enter the TEC for your process fluid.
Lubricating oils
NGL (Natural Gas Liquids) and LPG (Liquid Petroleum Gas)
50 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022 b) Set Referred Density Measurement Unit to the measurement units that you want to use for referred density.
c) Select Apply .
These parameters uniquely identify the API table to be used to calculate referred density. The selected
API table is displayed, and the meter automatically changes the density unit, temperature unit, pressure unit, and reference pressure to match the API table.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTPL or CTL).
Restriction
Not all combinations are supported by the API Referral application. See the list of API tables in this manual.
3. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line pressure.
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
Acceptable limits:
• 230.0 x 10 -6 to 930.0 x 10 -6 per °F
• 414.0 x 10 -6 to 1674.0 x 10 -6 per °C
5. Set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations. If you choose Other, select the temperature measurement unit and enter the reference temperature.
6. Set Reference Pressure to the pressure to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations.
Set up temperature and pressure data for API Referral using ProLink III
The API Referral application uses temperature and, optionally, pressure data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Note
Fixed values for temperature or pressure are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature or pressure value may produce inaccurate process data.
Prerequisites
The pressure measurement must be gauge pressure, not atmospheric pressure.
The pressure device must use the pressure unit that is configured in the transmitter.
If you are using an external temperature device, it must use the temperature unit that is configured in the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral .
Configuration and Use Manual 51
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Digital communications
Description
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals. This data will be available in addition to the internal RTD temperature data.
Setup a. Set Line Temperature Source
Communications.
b. Select Apply .
to Fixed Value or Digital c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
3. Choose the method you will use to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Digital communications
Description
A host writes pressure data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Setup a. Set Pressure Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs group on the ProLink III main window.
The current pressure value is displayed in the External Pressure field. Verify that the value is correct.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
• For digital communications, verify that the host has access to the required data.
5.1.3 Set up the API Referral application using a web browser
This section guides you through the tasks required to set up and implement the API Referral application.
Enable API Referral using a web browser
The API Referral application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the API Referral application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The API Referral application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Transmitter Options and ensure that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid
Volume.
52 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
2. If the concentration measurement application is enabled, disable it and select Apply .
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled simultaneously.
3. Enable API Referral and select Apply .
Configure API Referral using a web browser
The API Referral parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
You must know the reference temperature and reference pressure that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral .
2. Specify the API table to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations.
a) Set Process Fluid to the API table group that belongs to your process fluid.
API table group
A tables
B tables
C tables
D tables
E tables
Process fluids
Generalized crude and JP4
Generalized products: Gasoline, jet fuel, aviation fuel, kerosene, heating oils, fuel oils, diesel, gas oil
Liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion coefficient
(TEC). You will be required to enter the TEC for your process fluid.
Lubricating oils
NGL (Natural Gas Liquids) and LPG (Liquid Petroleum Gas) b) Set Referred Density Measurement Unit to the measurement units that you want to use for referred density.
c) Select Apply .
These parameters uniquely identify the API table to be used to calculate referred density. The selected
API table is displayed, and the meter automatically changes the density unit, temperature unit, pressure unit, and reference pressure to match the API table.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTPL or CTL).
Configuration and Use Manual 53
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Restriction
Not all combinations are supported by the API Referral application. See the list of API tables in this manual.
3. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line pressure.
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
Acceptable limits:
• 230.0 x 10 -6 to 930.0 x 10 -6 per °F
• 414.0 x 10 -6 to 1674.0 x 10 -6 per °C
5. Set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations. If you choose Other, select the temperature measurement unit and enter the reference temperature.
6. Set Reference Pressure to the pressure to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations.
Set up temperature and pressure data for API Referral using a web browser
The API Referral application uses temperature and, optionally, pressure data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Note
Fixed values for temperature or pressure are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature or pressure value may produce inaccurate process data.
Prerequisites
The pressure measurement must be gauge pressure, not atmospheric pressure.
The pressure device must use the pressure unit that is configured in the transmitter.
If you are using an external temperature device, it must use the temperature unit that is configured in the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral .
2. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
54 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Option
Digital communications
Description
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals. This data will be available in addition to the internal RTD temperature data.
Setup a. Set Line Temperature Source
Communications.
b. Click Apply .
to Fixed Value or Digital c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
3. Choose the method you will use to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Digital communications
Description
A host writes pressure data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Setup a. Set Pressure Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs group on the ProLink III main window.
The current pressure value is displayed in the External Pressure field. Verify that the value is correct.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
• For digital communications, verify that the host has access to the required data.
Configuration and Use Manual 55
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
5.1.4 API tables supported by the API Referral application
The API tables listed here are supported by the API Referral application.
Table 5-1: API tables, process fluids, measurement units, and default reference values
Process fluid
Generalized crude and JP4
Generalized products (gasoline, jet fuel, aviation fuel, kerosene, heating oils, fuel oils, diesel, gas oil)
Liquids with a constant density base or known thermal expansion
API tables
(calculations)
Referred density
CTL or
CTPL
Referred density
(API): unit and range
5A 6A Unit: °API
Range: 0 to 100 °API
23A 24A
53A
5B
54A
6B
Unit: SGU
Range: 0.6110 to
1.0760 SGU
Unit: kg/m 3
Range: 610 to
1075 kg/m ³
Unit: °API
Range: 0 to 85 °API
23B
53B
N/A
N/A
N/A
24B
54B
6C
24C
54C
Unit: SGU
Range: 0.6535 to
1.0760 SGU
Unit: kg/m 3
Range: 653 to
1075 kg/m ³
Unit: °API
Unit: SGU
Unit: kg/m ³
Lubricating oils
NGL (natural gas liquids) and LPG
(liquid petroleum gas)
5D
23D
53D
23E
53E
59E
6D
24D
54D
24E
54E
60E
Unit: °API
Range: − 10 to
+40 °API
Unit: SGU
Range: 0.8520 to
1.1640 SGU
Unit: kg/m ³
Range: 825 to
1164 kg/m ³
Unit: SGU
Unit: kg/m ³
Unit: kg/m ³
Default reference temp
60 °F
60 °F
15 °C
60 °F
60 °F
15 °C
60 °F
60 °F
15 °C
60 °F
60 °F
15 °C
60 °F
15 °C
20 °C
Default reference pressure
0 psi (g)
0 psi (g)
0 kPa (g)
0 psi (g)
0 psi (g)
0 kPa (g)
0 psi (g)
0 psi (g)
0 kPa (g)
0 psi (g)
0 psi (g)
0 kPa (g)
0 psi (g)
0 psi (g)
0 psi (g)
API standard
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.2.4
(1) Each API table represents a specialized equation defined by the American Petroleum Institute for a specific combination of process fluid, line conditions, and output.
56 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
(2) Referred density is calculated from line density. You must specify this table, either directly or by selecting the process fluid and base density measurement unit.
(3) You do not need to specify this table. It is invoked automatically as a result of the previous table selection.
(4) CTL is a correction factor based on online temperature. CTPL is a correction factor based on both line pressure and line temperature. Calculation of CTL and CTPL for A, B, C, and D table products is in accordance with API MPMS Chapter
11.1. Calculation of CTL and CTPL for E table products is in accordance with API MPMS Chapters 11.2.2, 11.2.4, and
11.2.5.
(5) The Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) replaces the referred density calculation. Use the CTL/CTPL table instead.
5.1.5 Process variables from the API Referral application
The API Referral application calculates several different process variables according to API standards.
CTPL
CTL
Referred density
API volume flow
Batch-weighted average density
Batch-weighted average temperature
API volume total
API volume inventory
Correction factor based on line temperature and line pressure.
Correction factor based on line temperature at saturation conditions.
The measured density after CTL or CTPL has been applied.
The measured volume flow rate after CTL or CTPL has been applied. Also called corrected volume flow .
One density value is recorded for each unit of flow (e.g., barrel, liter). The average is calculated from these values. The average is reset when the API totalizer is reset. Not available unless a totalizer has been configured with Source set to Corrected Volume
Flow.
One temperature value is recorded for each unit of flow (e.g., barrel, liter). The average is calculated from these values. The average is reset when the API totalizer is reset. Not available unless a totalizer has been configured with Source set to
Temperature-Corrected Volume Flow.
The total API volume measured by the transmitter since the last API totalizer reset.
Also called corrected volume total . Not available unless a totalizer has been configured with Source set to Corrected Volume Flow.
The total API volume measured by the transmitter since the last API inventory reset.
Also called corrected volume inventory . Not available unless an inventory has been configured with Source set to Corrected Volume Flow.
5.2 Set up concentration measurement
The concentration measurement application calculates concentration from line density and line temperature.
5.2.1 Preparing to set up concentration measurement
The procedure for setting up concentration measurement application depends on how your device was ordered and how you want to use the application. Review this information before you begin.
Requirements for concentration measurement
To use the concentration measurement application, the following conditions must be met:
• The concentration measurement application must be enabled.
• The API Referral application must be disabled.
Configuration and Use Manual 57
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• The Advanced Phase Measurement application must be disabled or set for the Liquid with Gas application.
• A concentration matrix must be loaded into one of the six slots on the transmitter.
Tip
In most cases, the concentration matrix that you ordered was loaded at the factory. If it was not, you have several options for loading a matrix. You can also build a matrix.
• Temperature Source must be configured and set up.
• One matrix must be selected as the active matrix (the matrix used for measurement).
Requirements for matrices
A matrix is the set of coefficients used to convert process data to concentration, plus related parameters. The matrix can be saved as a file.
The transmitter requires all matrices to be in .matrix format. You can use ProLink III to load matrices in other formats:
• .edf (used by ProLink II)
• .xml (used by ProLink III)
The transmitter can store matrices in one of the six slots in memory.
Any matrix in a slot is available for use. In other words, it can be selected as the active matrix and used for measurement. Matrices must be loaded into a slot before they can be used for measurement.
All matrices in slots must use the same derived variable.
For the 1600 Ethernet transmitter, use ProLink III to load a matrix from the computer to the slot.
Requirements for derived variables
A derived variable is the process variable that a concentration matrix measures. All other process variables are calculated from the derived variable. There are eight possible derived variables. Each matrix is designed for one specific derived variable.
The transmitter can store up to six matrices in six slots. All matrices in the six slots must use the same derived variable. If you change the setting of Derived Variable , all matrices are deleted from the six slots.
Tip
Always ensure that Derived Variable is set correctly before loading matrices into slots.
Derived variables and net flow rate
If you want the transmitter to calculate Net Mass Flow Rate, the derived variable must be set to Mass
Concentration (Density). If your matrix is not designed for Mass Concentration (Density), contact customer support for assistance.
If you want the transmitter to calculate Net Volume Flow Rate, the derived variable must be set to Volume
Concentration (Density). If your matrix is not designed for Volume Concentration (Density), contact customer support for assistance.
Derived variables based on specific gravity
The following derived variables are based on specific gravity:
• Specific Gravity
58 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
• Concentration (Specific Gravity)
• Mass Concentration (Specific Gravity)
• Volume Concentration (Specific Gravity)
If you are using one of these derived variables, two additional parameters can be configured:
• Reference Temperature of Water (default setting: 4 °C)
• Water Density at Reference Temperature (default setting: 999.99988 kg/m ³ )
These two parameters are used to calculate specific gravity.
You cannot set these parameters from the display. If the default values are not appropriate, you must use another method to set them.
Optional tasks in setting up concentration measurement
The following tasks are optional:
• Modifying names and labels
• Configuring extrapolation alerts
5.2.2 Set up concentration measurement using the display
This section guides you through most of the tasks related to setting up and implementing the concentration measurement application.
Restriction
This section does not cover building a concentration matrix. For detailed information on building a matrix, see the Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application Manual .
Enable concentration measurement using the display
The concentration measurement application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the concentration measurement application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Disable the following applications before enabling concentration measurement as concentration measurement cannot be enabled at the same time:
• Advanced Phase Measurement — gas with liquid
• API Referral
• Gas Standard Volume
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement .
2. Choose Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings and ensure that Flow Type is set to Liquid.
3. Return to the Process Measurement menu.
4. If the API Referral application is displayed in the menu, choose API Referral and ensure that Enabled/
Disabled is set to Disabled.
Configuration and Use Manual 59
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled simultaneously.
5. If the Advanced Phase Measurement application is displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Phase
Measurement → Application Setup and ensure that Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
6. Enable concentration measurement.
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
b) Set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled.
Set up temperature data using the display
The concentration measurement application uses line temperature data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup. Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor (RTD) is always available. Optionally, you can set up an external temperature device and use external temperature data.
The temperature setup that you establish here will be used for all concentration measurement matrices on this meter.
Important
Line temperature data is used in several different measurements and calculations. It is possible to use the internal RTD temperature in some areas and an external temperature in others. The transmitter stores the internal RTD temperature and the external temperature separately. However, the transmitter stores only one alternate temperature value, which may be either the external temperature or the configured fixed value.
Accordingly, if you choose a fixed temperature for some uses, and an external temperature for others, the external temperature will overwrite the fixed value.
Procedure
Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Internal temperature
Digital communications
Description
Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor
(RTD) will be used for all measurements and calculations. No external temperature data will be available.
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals. This data will be available in addition to the internal temperature data.
Setup a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement
→ Temperature .
b. Set External Temperature to Off.
a. Choose
→ b. Set
Menu →
Temperature .
Configuration
External Temperature
→
to On.
Process Measurement c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
Choose Menu → Service Tools → Service Data → View Process Variables and verify the value for External
Temperature.
60 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
• For digital communications, verify that the host has access to the required data.
Modify matrix names and labels using the display
For convenience, you can change the name of a concentration matrix and the label used for its measurement unit. This does not affect measurement.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Matrix .
2. Select the matrix that you want to modify.
3. Set Matrix Name to the name that will be used for this matrix.
4. Set Concentration Unit to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
If you want to use a custom label, you can use the display to select Special. However, you cannot use the display to configure the custom label. You must use another tool to change the label from Special to a user-defined string.
Modify extrapolation alerts using the display
You can enable and disable extrapolation alerts, and set extrapolation alert limits. These parameters control the behavior of the concentration measurement application but do not affect measurement directly.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If line density or line temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However, extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alerts are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is occurring.
Each concentration matrix has its own extrapolation alert limits.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Matrix .
2. Select the matrix that you want to modify.
3. Set Extrapolation Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alert will be posted.
4. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Application → Extrapolation Alerts .
5. Enable or disable the high and low limit alerts for temperature and density as desired.
Example: Extrapolation alerts in action
If Extrapolation Limit is set to 5%, High Limit (Temp) is enabled, and the active matrix is built for a temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), a high-temperature extrapolation alert will be posted if line temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
Configuration and Use Manual 61
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Select the active concentration matrix using the display
You must select the concentration matrix to be used for measurement. Although the transmitter can store up to six concentration matrices, only one matrix can be used for measurement at any one time.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Application .
2. Set Active Matrix to the matrix you want to use.
5.2.3 Set up concentration measurement using ProLink III
This section guides you through the tasks required to set up, configure, and implement concentration measurement.
Enable concentration measurement using ProLink III
The concentration measurement application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the concentration measurement application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Disable the following applications before enabling concentration measurement as concentration measurement cannot be enabled at the same time:
• Advanced Phase Measurement — gas with liquid
• API Referral
• Gas Standard Volume
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow and ensure that Volume
Flow Type is set to Liquid Volume.
2. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Advance Phase Measurement →
APM Status and ensure that Application Status is set to Disable or Liquid with Gas.
3. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Options .
4. Disable API Referral and set the Advance Phase Measurement application to Disabled or Single Liquid.
5. Set Concentration Measurement to Enabled and select Apply .
Load a concentration matrix using ProLink III
At least one concentration matrix must be loaded onto your transmitter. You can load up to six.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be enabled on your device.
For each concentration matrix that you want to load, you need a file containing the matrix data. The ProLink III installation includes a set of standard concentration matrices. Other matrices are available from Emerson. The file can be on your computer or in the transmitter internal memory.
62 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
The file must be in one of the formats that ProLink III supports. This includes:
• .xml (ProLink III)
• .matrix (1600)
If you are loading an .xml file, you must know the following information for your matrix:
• The derived variable that the matrix is designed to calculate
• The density unit that the matrix was built with
• The temperature unit that the matrix was built with
If you are loading a .matrix file, you must know the derived variable that the matrix is designed to calculate.
Important
• All concentration matrices on your transmitter must use the same derived variable.
• If you change the setting of Derived Variable , all existing concentration matrices will be deleted from the six slots on the transmitter. Set Derived Variable before loading concentration matrices.
• ProLink III loads matrices directly to one of the six transmitter slots.
Tip
In many cases, concentration matrices were ordered with the device and loaded at the factory. You may not need to load any matrices.
Procedure
1. If you are loading an .xml file, choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Line
Density and set Density Unit to the density unit used by your matrix.
Important
When you load a matrix in one of these formats, if the density unit is not correct, concentration data will be incorrect. The density units must match at the time of loading. You can change the density unit after the matrix is loaded.
2. If you are loading an .xml file, choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Line
Temperature and set Temperature Unit to the temperature unit used by your matrix.
Important
When you load a matrix in one of these formats, if the temperature unit is not correct, concentration data will be incorrect. The temperature units must match at the time of loading. You can change the temperature unit after the matrix is loaded.
3. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
4. In Step 1, ensure that the setting of Derived Variable matches the derived variable used by your matrix. If it does not, change it as required and select Apply .
Important
If you change the setting of Derived Variable , all existing concentration matrices will be deleted from the six slots. Verify the setting of Derived Variable before continuing.
Configuration and Use Manual 63
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
5. Load one or more matrices.
a) In Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the location (slot) to which the matrix will be loaded.
b) To load a .xml file from your computer, select Load Matrix from File , navigate to the file, and load it.
c) To load a .matrix file from your computer, select Load Matrix from My Computer , navigate to the file, and load it.
d) To load a .matrix file from the transmitter internal memory, select Load Matrix from 1600 Device
Memory, navigate to the file on the transmitter, and load it.
e) Repeat until all required matrices are loaded.
Set reference temperature values for specific gravity using ProLink III
When Derived Variable is set to any option based on specific gravity, you must set the reference temperature for water, then verify the density of water at the configured reference temperature. These values affect specific gravity measurement.
This requirement applies to the following derived variables:
• Specific Gravity
• Concentration (Specific Gravity)
• Mass Concentration (Specific Gravity)
• Volume Concentration (Specific Gravity)
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and select Change
Matrix .
3. Scroll to Step 3, then perform the following actions: a) Set Reference Temperature for Referred Density to the temperature to which line density will be corrected for use in the specific gravity calculation.
b) Set Reference Temperature for Water to the water temperature that will be used in the specific gravity calculation.
c) Set Water Density at Reference Temperature to the density of water at the specified reference temperature.
The transmitter automatically calculates the density of water at the specified temperature. The new value will be displayed the next time that transmitter memory is read. You can enter a different value if you prefer.
4. Select Apply at the bottom of Step 3.
64 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Set up temperature data using ProLink III
The concentration measurement application uses line temperature data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup. Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor (RTD) is always available. Optionally, you can set up an external temperature device and use external temperature data.
The temperature setup that you establish here will be used for all concentration measurement matrices on this meter.
Important
Line temperature data is used in several different measurements and calculations. It is possible to use the internal RTD temperature in some areas and an external temperature in others. The transmitter stores the internal RTD temperature and the external temperature separately. However, the transmitter stores only one alternate temperature value, which may be either the external temperature or the configured fixed value.
Accordingly, if you choose a fixed temperature for some uses, and an external temperature for others, the external temperature will overwrite the fixed value.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 4.
3. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Internal temperature
Digital communications
Description
Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor
(RTD) will be used for all measurements and calculations. No external temperature data will be available.
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals. This data will be available in addition to the internal RTD temperature data.
Setup a. Set b. Click a. Set
Line Temperature Source
Apply .
Line Temperature Source
Communications.
b. Click Apply .
to Internal.
to Fixed Value or Digital c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs group on the ProLink III main window.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
Configuration and Use Manual 65
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• For digital communications, verify that the host has access to the required data.
Modify matrix names and labels using ProLink III
For convenience, you can change the name of a concentration matrix and the label used for its measurement unit. This does not affect measurement.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and click Change
Matrix .
3. Scroll to Step 3, then perform the following actions: a) Set Concentration Units Label to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
b) If you set Concentration Units Label to Special, enter the custom label in User-Defined Label .
c) In Matrix Name , enter the name to be used for the matrix.
4. Select Apply at the bottom of Step 3.
Modify extrapolation alerts using ProLink III
You can enable and disable extrapolation alerts, and set extrapolation alert limits. These parameters control the behavior of the concentration measurement application but do not affect measurement directly.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If line density or line temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However, extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alerts are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is occurring.
Each concentration matrix has its own extrapolation alert limits.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and click Change
Matrix .
3. Scroll to Step 4.
4. Set Extrapolation Alert Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alert will be posted.
5. Enable or disable the high and low limit alerts for temperature and density, as desired, and click Apply .
Example: Extrapolation alerts in action
If Extrapolation Limit is set to 5%, High Limit (Temp) is enabled, and the active matrix is built for a temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), a high-temperature extrapolation alert will be posted if line temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
66 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Select the active concentration matrix using ProLink III
You must select the concentration matrix to be used for measurement. Although the transmitter can store up to six concentration matrices, only one matrix can be used for measurement at any one time.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Active Matrix to the matrix you want to use and select Change Matrix .
5.2.4 Set up concentration measurement using a web browser
This section guides you through the tasks required to set up, configure, and implement concentration measurement.
Enable the concentration measurement application using a web browser
The concentration measurement application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the concentration measurement application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be licensed on your transmitter.
The API Referral application must not be enabled on your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Transmitter Options and ensure that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid
Volume.
2. Under Permanent Features , set Concentration Measurement to Enabled and click Apply .
Set reference temperature values for specific gravity using a web browser
When Derived Variable is set to any option based on specific gravity, you must set the reference temperature for water, then verify the density of water at the configured reference temperature. These values affect specific gravity measurement.
This requirement applies to the following derived variables:
• Specific Gravity
• Concentration (Specific Gravity)
• Mass Concentration (Specific Gravity)
• Volume Concentration (Specific Gravity)
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement page is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Under Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and select Change
Matrix .
3. Under Step 3, perform the following actions:
Configuration and Use Manual 67
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600 a) Set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which line density will be corrected for use in the specific gravity calculation.
b) Set Reference Temperature of Water (Specific Gravity) to the water temperature that will be used in the specific gravity calculation.
c) Set Water Density at Reference Temperature to the density of water at the specified reference temperature.
The transmitter automatically calculates the density of water at the specified temperature. The new value will be displayed the next time that transmitter memory is read. You can enter a different value if you want to.
4. Select the Apply button at the bottom of Step 3.
Provide temperature data for concentration measurement using a web browser
The concentration measurement application uses line temperature data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup. Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor (RTD) is always available. Optionally, you can set up an external temperature device and use external temperature data.
The temperature setup that you establish here will be used for all concentration measurement matrices on this meter.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement page is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 4.
3. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Internal RTD temperature data
Description
Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor
(RTD) is used.
Setup a. Under b. Click
Line Temperature Data
Apply .
, set Source to RTD.
Digital communications
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals. This data will be available in addition to the internal RTD temperature data.
a. Under Line Temperature Data , set Source to Fixed Value or
Digital Communications.
b. Click Apply .
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed on the Process
Monitor page.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
68 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
• For digital communications, verify that the host has access to the required data.
Modify matrix names and labels using the a web browser
For convenience, you can change the name of a concentration matrix and the label used for its measurement unit. This does not affect measurement.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement page is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and select Change
Matrix .
3. Scroll to Step 3, then perform the following actions: a) Set Concentration Units Label to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
b) If you set Concentration Units Label to Special, enter the custom label in User-Defined Label .
c) In Matrix Name , enter the name to be used for the matrix.
4. Select the Apply button at the bottom of Step 3.
Modify extrapolation alerts for concentration measurement using a web browser
You can enable and disable extrapolation alerts, and set extrapolation alert limits. These parameters control the behavior of the concentration measurement application but do not affect measurement directly.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If line density or line temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However, extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alerts are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is occurring.
Each concentration matrix has its own extrapolation alert limits.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and click Change
Matrix .
3. Scroll to Step 4.
4. Set Extrapolation Alarm Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alert will be posted.
5. Enable or disable the high and low limit alerts for temperature and density, as desired, and click Apply .
Configuration and Use Manual 69
Configure process measurement applications
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Example: Extrapolation alerts in action
If Extrapolation Alarm Limit is set to 5%, High Extrapolation Limit (Temperature) is enabled, and the active matrix is built for a temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), a high-temperature extrapolation alert will be posted if line temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
Select the active concentration matrix using a web browser
You must select the concentration matrix to be used for measurement. Although the transmitter can store up to six concentration matrices, only one matrix can be used for measurement at any one time.
Procedure
1. Choose Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
The Concentration Measurement page is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Active Matrix to the matrix you want to use and click Change Matrix .
70 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
6 Configure advanced options for process measurement
6.1 Configure Response Time
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Response Time
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Response Time
Configuration → Process Measurement → Response Time
Response Time controls the speed of various internal processes that are involved in retrieving electronic data from the sensor and converting it to process data.
Response Time affects all process and diagnostic variables.
Procedure
Set Response Time as desired.
Option Description
Normal Appropriate for typical applications.
High Filtering Slower response. Appropriate for applications with significant amount of entrained gas or process noise.
Low Filtering Fastest response. Appropriate for proving or filling applications.
6.2 Detect and report two-phase flow
Two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process) can cause a variety of process control issues.
The transmitter provides two methods to detect and report or respond to two-phase flow.
6.2.1 Detect two-phase flow using density
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
The transmitter can use line density data to detect two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process). The density limits are user-specified. When two-phase flow is detected, an alert is posted.
Procedure
1. Set Two-Phase Flow Low Limit to the lowest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values below this will cause the transmitter to post a Process Aberration alert.
Configuration and Use Manual 71
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Tip
Gas entrainment can cause your process density to drop temporarily. To reduce the occurrence of twophase flow alerts that are not significant to your process, set Two-Phase Flow Low Limit slightly below your expected lowest process density.
You must enter Two-Phase Flow Low Limit in g/cm ³ , even if you configured another unit for density measurement.
• Default: 0 g/cm ³
• Range: 0 g/cm ³ to the sensor limit
2. Set Two-Phase Flow High Limit to the highest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values above this will cause the transmitter to post a Process Aberration alert.
Tip
To reduce the occurrence of two-phase flow alerts that are not significant to your process, set Two-
Phase Flow High Limit slightly above your expected highest process density.
You must enter Two-Phase Flow High Limit in g/cm ³ , even if you configured another unit for density measurement.
• Default: 5 g/cm ³
• Range: 5 g/cm ³ to the sensor limit
3. Set Two-Phase Flow Timeout to the number of seconds that the transmitter will wait for a two-phase flow condition to clear before posting the alert.
• Default: 0 seconds, meaning that the alert will be posted immediately
• Range: 0 to 60 seconds
6.2.2 Detect two-phase flow using sensor diagnostics
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Source
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → mA Output
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Channel Type → mA Output
The transmitter always monitors sensor diagnostics and applies a two-phase flow algorithm. You can assign an mA Output to report the results of this calculation: single-phase flow, moderate two-phase flow, or severe two-phase flow. Severe two-phase flow can cause the meter to stop functioning.
Prerequisites
Channel B must be configured as mA Output.
Procedure
Set mA Output Source to Two-Phase Flow Detection.
The signal from the mA Output indicates the current state of the process:
• 12 mA: Single-phase flow
• 16 mA: Moderate two-phase flow
72 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
• 20 mA: Severe two-phase flow
6.3 Configure Flow Rate Switch
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events → Flow Rate Switch
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output → Source → Flow Switch Indication
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Discrete Output → Source → Flow Switch Indication
Flow Rate Switch is used to indicate that the flow rate has moved past a user-specified setpoint, in either direction. The flow rate switch is implemented with a user-configurable hysteresis.
Typically, a Discrete Output is assigned as the flow rate switch indicator. The Discrete Output can be wired to an external device such as a light or a horn.
Prerequisites
A channel must be configured as a Discrete Output, and the Discrete Output must be available for this use.
Procedure
1. Set Discrete Output Source to Flow Switch, if you have not already done so.
2. Set Flow Switch Variable to the flow variable that you want to use to control the flow rate switch.
3. Set Flow Switch Setpoint to the value at which the flow switch will be triggered (after Hysteresis is applied).
Depending on the polarity of the Discrete Output:
• If the flow rate is below this value, the Discrete Output is ON.
• If the flow rate is above this value, the Discrete Output is OFF.
4. Set Hysteresis to the percentage of variation above and below the setpoint that will operate as a deadband.
Hysteresis defines a range around the setpoint within which the flow rate switch will not change.
• Default: 5%
• Range: 0.1% to 10%
Example
If Flow Switch Setpoint = 100 g/sec and Hysteresis = 5% , and the first measured flow rate is above
100 g/sec, the discrete output is OFF. It will remain OFF unless the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec. If this happens, the discrete output will turn ON, and remain ON until the flow rate rises above 105 g/sec.
At this point it turns OFF and will remain OFF until the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec.
Related information
Configuration and Use Manual 73
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
6.4 Configure events
An event occurs when the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves past a user-defined setpoint. Events are used to provide notification of process changes or to perform specific transmitter actions if a process change occurs.
6.4.1 Configure a basic event
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Events → Basic Events
Not available
A basic event is used to provide notification of process changes. A basic event occurs (is ON) if the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint. Event status can be queried via digital communications, and a Discrete Output can be configured to report event status.
You can define up to two basic events.
Procedure
1. Select the event that you want to configure.
2. Assign a process variable to the event.
3. Specify Event Type .
Option
HI
LO
Description x > A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is greater than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
x < A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is less than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
4. Set a value for Setpoint A .
5. Optional: Configure a Discrete Output to switch states in response to the event status.
Related information
Configure Discrete Output Source
6.4.2 Configure an enhanced event
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events
Device Tools → Configuration → Events → Enhanced Events
Configuration → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events
An enhanced event is used to provide notification of process changes and, optionally, to perform specific transmitter actions if the event occurs. An enhanced event occurs (is ON) if the real-time value of a user-
74 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022 specified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint, or in range (IN) or out of range (OUT) with respect to two user-defined setpoints.
You can define up to five enhanced events. For each enhanced event, you can assign one or more actions that the transmitter will perform if the enhanced event occurs.
Procedure
1. Select the event that you want to configure.
2. Assign a process variable to the event.
3. Specify Event Type .
Option
HI
LO
IN
OUT
Description x > A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is greater than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
x < A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is less than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
A ≤ x ≤ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is in range, that is, between Setpoint A and Setpoint B , endpoints included.
x ≤ A or x ≥ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is out of range, that is, less than Setpoint A or greater than Setpoint B , endpoints included.
4. Set values for the required setpoints.
• For HI and LO events, set Setpoint A .
• For IN and OUT events, set Setpoint A and Setpoint B .
5. Optional: Configure a Discrete Output to switch states in response to the event status.
6. Optional: Specify the action or actions that the transmitter will perform when the event occurs.
Option
Display
ProLink III
Description
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup →
Enhanced Events , select any enhanced event, and choose Assign Actions
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Inputs →
Action Assignment
Related information
Configure Discrete Output Source
Configuration and Use Manual 75
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Options for Enhanced Event Action
Action
Standard
Start sensor zero Start Zero Calibration
Totalizers
Start/stop all totalizers and inventories Start/stop all totalizers
Reset totalizer X
Reset all totalizers and inventories
Concentration measurement
Increment CM matrix
Display
Reset Total X
Reset All Totals
Increment Matrix
Meter verification
Start meter verification test Start SMV
Label
PLIII
Start Sensor Zero
Start or Stop All Totalizers
Totalizer X
Reset All Totals
Increment ED Curve
Start Meter Verification
6.5 Configure totalizers and inventories
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Totalizers & Inventories
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers
Configuration → Totalizers/Inventories
The transmitter provides seven configurable totalizers and seven configurable inventories. Each totalizer and each inventory can be configured independently.
Totalizers track the process since the last totalizer reset. Inventories track the process since the last inventory reset. Inventories are typically used to track the process across totalizer resets.
Tip
The default configurations cover the most typical uses of totalizers and inventories. You may not need to change any configurations.
Prerequisites
Before configuring the totalizers and inventories, ensure that the process variables you plan to track are available on the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Select the totalizer or inventory that you want to configure.
2. Set Totalizer Source or Inventory Source to the process variable that the totalizer or inventory will track.
Option
Mass flow
Description
The totalizer or inventory will track Mass Flow Rate and calculate total mass since the last reset.
76 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Option
Volume flow
Gas standard volume flow
Temperature-corrected volume flow
Standard volume flow
Net mass flow
Net volume flow
Description
The totalizer or inventory will track Volume Flow Rate and calculate total volume since the last reset.
The totalizer or inventory will track Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate and calculate total volume since the last reset.
The totalizer or inventory will track Temperature-Corrected Volume Flow
Rate and calculate total volume since the last reset.
The totalizer or inventory will track Standard Volume Flow Rate and calculate total volume since the last reset.
The totalizer or inventory will track Net Mass Flow Rate and calculate total mass since the last reset.
The totalizer or inventory will track Net Volume Flow Rate and calculate total volume since the last reset.
Note
The totalizer/inventory value will not automatically be reset when the source is changed. The user must manually reset the totalizer/inventory.
Tip
If you are using the API Referral application and you want to measure batch-weighted average density or batch-weighted average temperature, you must have a totalizer configured to measure temperature-corrected volume flow.
3. Set Totalizer Direction to specify how the totalizer or inventory will respond to forward or reverse flow.
Option
Forward Only
Reverse Only
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Flow direction
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Totalizer and inventory behavior
Totals increment
Totals do not change
Totals do not change
Totals increment
Totals increment
Totals decrement
Totals increment
Totals increment
Important
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
Configuration and Use Manual 77
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table 6-1: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Actual flow direction
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow on sensor)
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on sensor)
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and totalizers
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
4. Optional: Set User Name to the name you want to use for the inventory or totalizer.
User-Defined Label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
The transmitter automatically generates a name for each totalizer and inventory, based on its source, direction, and type.
Example
• Source =Mass Flow
• Direction =Forward Only
• User-Defined Label = Mass Fwd Total
Example
• Source =Gas Standard Volume Flow
• Direction =Bidirectional
• User-Defined Label = GSV Bidir Inv
The specified name is used on the transmitter display and on all interfaces that support it. If User Name contains only spaces, the transmitter-generated name is used. Not all interfaces support totalizer and inventory names.
Example: Checking for backflow
You suspect that there is a significant amount of backflow through the sensor. To collect data, configure two totalizers as follows:
• Source =Mass Flow, Direction =Forward Only
• Source =Mass Flow, Direction =Reverse Only
Reset both totalizers, allow them to run for an appropriate period, then look at the amount of reverse flow as a percentage of forward flow.
Example: Tracking three different process fluids
Three tanks are connected to a loading dock through a single meter. Each tank contains a different process fluid. You want to track each process fluid separately.
1. Set up three totalizers, one for each tank.
2. Name the totalizers Tank 1 , Tank 2 , and Tank 3 .
78 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
3. Configure each totalizer as required for the corresponding process fluid.
4. Stop and reset all three totalizers to ensure that the beginning values are 0.
5. When loading from a tank, start the corresponding totalizer, and stop it when the load is finished.
6.5.1 Default settings for totalizers and inventories
Direction Totalizer or inventory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Source (process variable assignment
Mass flow
Volume flow
Temperature-corrected volume flow
Gas standard volume flow
Standard volume flow
Net mass flow
Net volume flow
Forward Only
Forward Only
Forward Only
Forward Only
Forward Only
Forward Only
Forward Only
Name of totalizer
Name of inventory
Mass Fwd Total
Mass Fwd Inv
Volume Fwd Total
Volume Fwd Inv
API Volume Fwd Total
API Volume Fwd Inv
GSV Fwd Total
GSV Fwd Inv
Standard Vol Fwd Total
Standard Vol Fwd Inv
Net Mass Fwd Total
Net Mass Fwd Inv
Net Vol Fwd Total
Net Vol Fwd Inv
6.6 Configure logging for totalizers and inventories
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Totalizer Log
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Log
Configuration → Totalizers/Inventories → Totalizer Log
The transmitter can write the current value of four totalizers or inventories to a log, at user-specified intervals.
You can generate a log file from this data for viewing and analysis.
Procedure
1. Specify the date on which totalizer logging will begin.
You must specify a future date. If you try to specify the current date, the transmitter will reject the setting.
2. Specify the time at which totalizer logging will begin.
3. Specify the number of hours between records.
4. Select up to four totalizers or inventories to be logged.
Configuration and Use Manual 79
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
6.7 Configure Process Variable Fault Action
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Output Fault Actions
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
Configuration → Alert Setup → Output Fault Actions
Process Variable Fault Action specifies the values that will be reported via the display and digital communications if the device encounters a fault condition. The values are also sent to the outputs for processing against their configured fault actions.
Procedure
Set Process Variable Fault Action as desired.
Default: None
Restriction
If you set Process Variable Fault Action to NAN, you cannot set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency
Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Important
• If you want the mA Output to continue reporting process data during fault conditions, you must set both
Process Variable Fault Action and mA Output Fault Action to None . If mA Output Fault Action is set to
None and Process Variable Fault Action is set to any other option, the mA Output will produce the signal associated with the selection.
• If you want the Frequency Output to continue reporting process data during fault conditions, you must set both Process Variable Fault Action and Frequency Output Fault Action to None . If Frequency Output
Fault Action is set to None and Process Variable Fault Action is set to any other option, the Frequency
Output will produce the signal associated with the selection.
6.7.1 Options for Process Variable Fault Action
Display
Upscale
Label
ProLink III
Upscale
Web browser
Upscale
Description
Downscale Downscale Downscale
• Process variable values indicate that the value is greater than the upper sensor limit.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Process variable values indicate that the value is lower than the lower sensor limit.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
80 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Display
Zero
Label
ProLink III
Zero
Not-a-Number (NAN) Not a Number
Flow to Zero
None (default)
Flow to Zero
None
Web browser
Zero
Not a Number
Flow to Zero
None (default)
Description
• Flow rate variables go to the value that represents a flow rate of 0 (zero).
• Density is reported as 0 .
• Temperature is reported as 0 °C , or the equivalent if other units are used (e.g.,
32 °F .
• Drive gain is reported as measured.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Process variables are reported as IEEE
NAN .
• Drive gain is reported as measured.
• Modbus scaled integers are reported as
Max Int .
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Flow rates are reported as 0 .
• Other process variables are reported as measured.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• All process variables are reported as measured.
• Totalizers increment if they are running.
6.7.2 Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and other fault actions
The setting of Process Variable Fault Action affects the operation of the mA Outputs, Frequency Outputs, and Discrete Outputs if the corresponding output fault actions are set to None.
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and mA Output Fault Action
If mA Output Fault Action is set to None, the mA Output signal depends on the setting of Process Variable
Fault Action .
If the device detects a fault condition:
1.
Process Variable Fault Action is evaluated and applied.
2.
mA Output Fault Action is evaluated.
• If it is set to None, the output reports the value associated with the setting of Process Variable
Fault Action .
• If it is set to any other option, the output performs the specified fault action.
Configuration and Use Manual 81
Configure advanced options for process measurement
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
If you want the mA Output to continue to report process data during fault conditions, you must set both mA
Output Fault Action and Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and Frequency Output Fault Action
If Frequency Output Fault Action is set to None, the Frequency Output signal depends on the setting of
Process Variable Fault Action .
If the device detects a fault condition:
1.
Process Variable Fault Action is evaluated and applied.
2.
Frequency Output Fault Action is evaluated.
• If it is set to None, the output reports the value associated with the setting of Process Variable
Fault Action .
• If it is set to any other option, the output performs the specified fault action.
If you want the Frequency Output to continue to report process data during fault conditions, you must set both Frequency Output Fault Action and Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and Discrete Output Fault Action
If Discrete Output Fault Action is set to None and Discrete Output Source is set to Flow Rate Switch, the
Discrete Output state during a fault depends on the setting of Process Variable Fault Action .
If the device detects a fault condition:
1.
Process Variable Fault Action is evaluated and applied.
2.
Discrete Output Fault Action is evaluated.
• If it is set to None, and Discrete Output Source is set to Flow Rate Switch, the Discrete Output will use the value determined by the current setting of Process Variable Fault Action to determine if a flow rate switch has occurred.
• If Discrete Output Source is set to any other option, the setting of Process Variable Fault Action is irrelevant to the behavior of the Discrete Output during fault conditions. The Discrete Output is set to the specified fault action.
If you want the Discrete Output to report a flow rate switch appropriately during fault conditions, you must set both Discrete Output Fault Action and Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Related information
Configure mA Output Fault Action
Configure Frequency Output Fault Action
Configure Discrete Output Fault Action
82 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
7 Configure device options and preferences
7.1 Configure the transmitter display
You can control the language used on the display, the process variables shown on the display, and a variety of display behaviors.
7.1.1 Configure the language used on the display
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Language
Device Tools → Configuration → Local Display Settings → Transmitter Display → General → Language
Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Language
Language controls the language that the display uses for process data, menus, and information.
The languages available depend on your transmitter model and version.
Procedure
Set Language to the desired language.
7.1.2 Configure the process variables shown on the display
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Display Variables
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables
Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables
You can control the process variables shown on the display and the order in which they appear. The display can scroll through up to 15 process variables in any order you choose. This configuration applies to both autoscroll and manual scrolling.
By default, one process variable is shown at a time. You can configure a custom display screen that shows two process variables at a time.
Restriction
You cannot remove all display variables. At least one display variable must be configured.
Notes
• If you have a display variable configured to show a volume process variable, and you change Volume Flow
Type to Gas Standard Volume, the display variable is automatically changed to the equivalent GSV variable, and vice versa.
• For all other display variables, if the process variable becomes unavailable due to changes in configuration, the transmitter will not display that variable.
Procedure
For each display variable, select the process variable to be shown in that position in the rotation.
Configuration and Use Manual 83
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
You can skip positions and you can repeat process variables.
Table 7-1: Default configuration for display variables
Display variable
Display Variable 1
Display Variable 2
Display Variable 3
Display Variable 4
Display Variable 5
Display Variable 6
Display Variable 7
Display Variable 8
Display Variable 9
Display Variable 10
Display Variable 11
Display Variable 12
Display Variable 13
Display Variable 14
Display Variable 15
None
None
None
None
None
None
Process variable assignment
Mass flow rate
Mass total
Volume flow rate
Volume total
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
None
None
7.1.3 Configure a two-line display screen
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Display Variables → 2-Value View
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables → 2 PV Screen Slot # X
Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables → 2 PV Screen Slot # X
You can configure one display screen to show two process variables at a time. For each of these process variables, the current value and the measurement is shown.
The two-line display screen operates like one of the basic 15 screens. You can use ⌄ and ⌃ to scroll to it. If Auto
Scroll is enabled, the two-line screen will be the last screen in the cycle.
7.1.4 Configure the number of decimal places (precision) shown on the display
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Decimals on Display
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables → Decimal Places for x
Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables → Decimal Places for x
84 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
You can specify the precision (the number of decimal places) that the display uses for each display variable.
You can set the precision independently for each display variable.
The display precision does not affect the actual value of the variable, the value used in calculations, or the value reported via outputs or digital communications.
Procedure
1. Select a process variable or a diagnostic variable.
You can configure the precision for all variables, whether or not they are assigned as display variables.
The configured precision will be stored and used when applicable.
2. Set Number of Decimal Places to the number of decimal places to be used when this variable is shown on the display.
• Default:
— Temperature variables: 2
— All other variables: 4
• Range: 0 to 5
Tip
The lower the precision, the greater the change must be for it to be reflected on the display. Do not set
Number of Decimal Places too low to be useful.
7.1.5 Turn on and turn off automatic scrolling through the display variables
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Auto Scroll
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Auto Scroll
Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Auto Scroll
You can configure the display to automatically scroll through the list of display variables or to show a single display variable until the operator activates Scroll . If Auto Scroll is turned on, you can configure the number of seconds that each display variable will be shown.
Procedure
1. Turn on or turn off Auto Scroll as desired.
Option Description
On The display automatically shows each display variable for the number of seconds specified by Scroll Rate , then shows the next display variable. The operator can move to the next display variable at any time by activating Scroll .
Off The display shows Display Variable 1 and does not scroll automatically. The operator can move to the next display variable at any time by activating Scroll .
Default: Off
Configuration and Use Manual 85
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2. If you turned on Auto Scroll , set Scroll Rate as desired.
• Default: 10
• Range: 1 to 30 seconds
Tip
Scroll Rate may not be available until you apply Auto Scroll .
7.1.6 Configure the display backlight
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Backlight
Configuration → Transmitter Display → Backlight
You can control the intensity and contrast of the backlight on the display's LCD panel.
Procedure
1. Set Intensity as desired.
• Default: 50
• Range: 0 to 100
2. Set Contrast as desired.
• Default: 50
• Range: 0 to 100
7.1.7 Configure security for the display
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Not available
When using the display, you can require users to enter a password to do any of the following tasks:
• Enter the main menu
• Change a parameter
• Access alert data through the display
• Start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories via the context menu
The display password can be the same or different from the totalizer/inventory context menu control password. If different, the display password is used to reset, start, and stop totalizers or inventories using
Menu → Operations → Totalizers .
86 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Procedure
1. Configure Password Required as desired.
Option
At Write
Enter Menu
Description
When an user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are prompted to enter the display password.
When the menu is selected from the process variable screen, the display password will be immediately required if Password Required is set.
Never (default) When a user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are prompted to activate ⇦⇧⇩⇨ . This is designed to protect against accidental changes to configuration. It is not a security measure.
2. If the At Write or Enter Menu option was selected, enable or disable alert security as desired.
Option Description
Enabled If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display but the alert banner is not displayed. If the operator attempts to enter the alert menu, they are prompted to enter the display password.
Disabled If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display and the alert banner is displayed automatically. No password or confirmation is required to enter the alert menu.
Restriction
You cannot set Password Required to Never and enable alert security.
• If you did not enable Password Required , alert security is disabled and cannot be enabled.
• Alert security is disabled automatically if you set Password Required to Never after:
— Password Required is initially set to either At Write or Enter Menu
— Alert security is enabled
3. If Password Required has been set to At Write or Enter Menu, you will be prompted to enter the desired password.
• Default: AAAA
• Range: Any four alphanumeric characters
• Password Required must be set to At Write or Enter Menu to enable the totalizer/inventory control context menu password option.
Important
If you enable Password Required but you do not change the display password, the transmitter will post a configuration alert.
Configuration and Use Manual 87
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
4. Configure Main Menu Available as desired.
Option Description
Enabled The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will be accessible.
Disabled The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will not be accessible.
Important
Once Main Menu Available has been disabled, you cannot enable it from the local display. Use another configuration tool, such as ProLink III, to re-enable main menu access from the local display.
7.1.8 Configure totalizer and inventory control
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security → Totalizers & Inventories
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Control Methods
Configuration → Security → Totalization Control Methods
You can enable or disable the operator's ability to start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories. The totalizer/ inventory control context menus password can also be configured. The context menu is accessed by selecting the options menu from the process variable screen when a total or inventory is displayed.
These parameters do not affect the operator's ability to start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories using another tool.
Procedure
1. Enable or disable Reset Totalizers , as desired.
Default = Enable
2. Enable or disable Start/Stop Totalizers , as desired.
Default = Enable
3. Enable or disable Reset Inventory , as desired.
Default = Disable
4. Enable or disable Start/Stop Inventory , as desired.
Default = Disable
5. If required, configure the totalizer/inventory control context menu password.
Option Description
No password
(default)
Start, stop or reset totalizer/inventory actions via the context menu do not require a password.
Password Required When a user selects Start/Stop or Reset from the context menu and the password is enabled for totalizer/inventory control, the user is required to enter a password before the action occurs.
88 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
If the context menu password option has been set to Password Required , you will be prompted to enter the password.
• Default: AAAA
• Range: Any four alphanumeric characters
• The display Password Required must be set to At Write or Enter Menu to enable the totalizer/ inventory control context menu password option.
Important
If you enable Password Required for totalizers and inventories, but you do not change the password from the default, the transmitter will post a configuration alert.
7.2 Configure the transmitter response to alerts
7.2.1 Configure the transmitter response to alerts using the display
For some alerts, you can change the transmitter response to an alert by setting the alert severity. You can also configure the transmitter to ignore some alerts and conditions.
The transmitter implements the NAMUR NE 107 specification for alerts. NAMUR NE 107 categorizes alerts by the suggested operator action, not by cause or symptom. Each alert has one or more associated conditions.
Important
The transmitter reports all the process and device conditions that were reported by previous transmitters.
However, the transmitter does not report them as individual alerts. Instead, the transmitter reports them as conditions associated with alerts.
Procedure
• To change the severity of an alert: a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts .
b) Select the alert.
c) Set Alert Severity as desired.
Option
Failure
Description
The event is serious enough to require fault actions by the transmitter. The event may be either device-related or process-related. Operator action is strongly recommended.
Function Check Configuration change or device testing. No fault actions are performed. The operator may need to complete a procedure.
Out of
Specification
Maintenance
Required
The process is outside user-specified limits or device limits. No fault actions are performed. The operator should check the process.
Device maintenance is recommended, either near-term or mid-term.
Configuration and Use Manual 89
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• To ignore an alert: a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts .
b) Select the alert.
c) Set Alert Detection to Ignore.
If an alert is ignored, any occurrence of this alert is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
• To ignore a condition: a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts .
b) Select the alert associated with the condition.
c) Select Condition Detection.
d) Select the condition and set it to Ignore.
If a condition is ignored, any occurrence of this condition is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
7.2.2 Configure the transmitter response to alerts using ProLink III
For some alerts, you can change the transmitter response to an alert by setting the alert severity. You can also configure the transmitter to ignore some alerts and conditions.
The transmitter implements the NAMUR NE 107 specification for alerts. NAMUR NE 107 categorizes alerts by the suggested operator action, not by cause or symptom. Each alert has one or more associated conditions.
Important
The transmitter reports all the process and device conditions that were reported by previous transmitters.
However, the transmitter does not report them as individual alerts. Instead, the transmitter reports them as conditions associated with alerts.
Procedure
• To change the severity of an alert: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Alert Severity .
b) Select the alert.
c) Set the severity as desired.
Option
Failure
Description
The event is serious enough to require fault actions by the transmitter. The event may be either device-related or process-related. Operator action is strongly recommended.
Function Check Configuration change or device testing. No fault actions are performed. The operator may need to complete a procedure.
Out of
Specification
Maintenance
Required
The process is outside user-specified limits or device limits. No fault actions are performed. The operator should check the process.
Device maintenance is recommended, either near-term or mid-term.
90 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
• To ignore an alert: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Alert Severity .
b) Select the alert.
c) Set the severity to Ignore.
If an alert is ignored, any occurrence of this alert is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
• To ignore a condition: a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts .
b) Select the alert associated with the condition and expand it.
c) Select the condition and set it to Ignore.
If a condition is ignored, any occurrence of this condition is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
7.2.3 Configure Fault Timeout
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Output Fault Actions → Fault Timeout (sec)
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing → Fault Timeout
Configuration → Alert Setup → Output Fault Actions → Fault Timeout
Fault Timeout controls the delay before fault actions are performed.
The fault timeout period begins when the transmitter detects an alert condition.
• During the fault timeout period, the transmitter continues to report its last valid measurements.
• If the fault timeout period expires while the alert is still active, the fault actions are performed.
• If the alert condition clears before the fault timeout expires, no fault actions are performed.
Restriction
• Fault Timeout is not applied to all alerts. For some alerts, fault actions are performed as soon as the alert condition is detected. See the list of alerts and conditions for details.
• Fault Timeout is applicable only when Alert Severity = Failure. For all other settings of Alert Severity ,
Fault Timeout is irrelevant.
Procedure
Set Fault Timeout as desired.
• Default: 0 seconds
• Range: 0 to 60 seconds
If you set Fault Timeout to 0, fault actions are performed as soon as the alert condition is detected.
Configuration and Use Manual 91
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
7.2.4 Alerts, conditions, and configuration options
For more information on these alerts, see
Status alerts, causes, and recommendations
.
Configuration Error
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-2: Configuration Error conditions
Name
[020] Calibration Factors Missing
[021] Incorrect Sensor Type
[030] Incorrect Board Type
Core Processor Update Failed
Password Not Set
Time Not Entered
Batcher Not Configured
[120] Curve Fit Failure (Concentration)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Ignorable
No
Yes
No
Core Low Power
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-3: Core Low Power conditions
Name
[031] Low Power
Configuration Warning
Default severity: Maintenance Required
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-4: Configuration Warning conditions
Name
[103] Configuration Warning
No Permanent License
Clock Failure
Transmitter Software Update Failed
Ignorable
No
Ignorable
Yes
No
No
Yes
92 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Drive Over Range
Default severity: Maintenance
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-5: Drive Over-Range conditions
Name
[102] Drive Overrange
Electronics Failed
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-6: Electronics Failed conditions
Name
[002] RAM Error (Core Processor)
[018] EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
[019] RAM Error (Transmitter)
[022] Configuration Database Corrupt (Core Processor)
[024] Program Corrupt (Core Processor)
Watchdog Error
Event Active
Default severity: Out of Speculation
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-7: Event Active conditions
Name
Enhanced Event [1 - 5] Active
Event [1 - 2] Active
Extreme Primary Purpose Variable
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-8: Extreme Primary Purpose Variable conditions
Name
[005] Mass Flow Rate Overrange
Configuration and Use Manual
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Ignorable
Yes
No
No
No
Ignorable
No
No
No
Ignorable
Yes
Yes
Ignorable
No
93
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table 7-8: Extreme Primary Purpose Variable conditions (continued)
Name
[008] Density Overrange
Ignorable
No
Function Check Failed or Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Default severity: Maintenance Required
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-9: Function Check Failed or Smart Meter Verification Aborted conditions
Name
[010] Calibration Failed
[034] Smart Meter Verification Failed
[035] Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Ignorable
No
Yes
Yes
Function Check in Progress
Default severity: Function Check
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-10: Function Check in Progress conditions
Name
[104] Calibration in Progress
[131] Smart Meter Verification in Progress
Ignorable
No
Yes
Output Fixed
Default severity: Function Check
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-11: Output Fixed conditions
Name
[111] Frequency Output Fixed
[119] Discrete Output Fixed mA Output Fixed
Output Saturated
Default severity: Out of Speculation
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Ignorable
No
No
No
94 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table 7-12: Output Saturated conditions
Name
[110] Frequency Output 1 Saturated mA Output 3 Saturated
Process Aberration
Default severity: Out of Speculation
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-13: Process Aberration conditions
Name
[105] Two-Phase Flow
[116] Temperature Overrange (API Referral)
[117] Density Overrange (API Referral)
[121] Extrapolation Alert (Concentration)
[123] Pressure Overrange (API Referral)
[138] TBR Active
Batch Time Out
Moderate Two-Phase Flow
Severe Two-Phase Flow
Security Breach
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-14: Security Breach conditions
Name
[027] Security Breach
Sensor Being Simulated
Default severity: Function Check
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-15: Sensor Being Simulated conditions
Name
[132] Sensor Simulation Active
Configuration and Use Manual
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Ignorable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ignorable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ignorable
No
Ignorable
No
95
Configure device options and preferences
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Sensor Failed
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-16: Sensor Failed conditions
Name
[003] Sensor Failed
[016] Sensor Temperature (RTD) Failure
[017] Sensor Case Temperature (RTD) Failure
Sensor-Transmitter Communication Error
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-17: Sensor-Transmitter Communication Error conditions
Name
[026] Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
[028] Core Process Write Failure
Transmitter Initializing
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-18: Transmitter Initializing conditions
Name
[009] Transmitter Initializing/Warming Up
Tube Not Full
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-19: Tube Not Full conditions
Name
[033]
Ignorable
No
No
No
Ignorable
No
No
Ignorable
No
Ignorable
96 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
8 Integrate the meter with the control system
8.1 Channel configuration
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel x
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel x
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel x
8.2 Configure Ethernet Channel A
Channel A is used exclusively for Ethernet communication.
Signal
Channel options
Channel A
EtherNet/IP
ProLink III and the Integrated Web server can always be connected to Channel A
Modbus TCP
Channel B mA Output
8.3 Configure I/O Channel B
Channel B is a configurable I/O channel.
Channel B can be used for any of the following outputs:
• mA Output
• Frequency Output
• Discrete Output
Prerequisites
Important
To avoid causing process errors:
• The channel configuration must match the I/O wiring.
• Before changing the channel configuration, ensure that all control loops affected by the channel are under manual control.
Procedure
1. Set Channel Type as desired.
2. Set Power Source as desired.
Frequency Output
Discrete Output
Configuration and Use Manual 97
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Option
Internal (Active)
External (Passive)
Description
The channel is powered by the transmitter.
The channel is powered by an external power source.
Postrequisites
Perform or verify the corresponding output or input configuration. When the configuration of a channel is changed, the channel's behavior will be controlled by the configuration that is stored for the selected input or output type, and the stored configuration may not be appropriate for your process.
After verifying channel and output configuration, return the control loop to automatic control.
8.4 Configure an mA Output
Use an mA Output to report current values of process variables. The mA signal varies between 4 mA and
20 mA in proportion to the current value of the assigned process variable.
Depending on your purchase order and channel configuration, your transmitter may have 0-1 mA Outputs.
8.4.1 Configure mA Output Source
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Source
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → mA Output
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Channel Type → mA Output mA Output Source specifies the process variable that is reported by the mA Output.
Prerequisites
• If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set Volume Flow Type as desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
• If you plan to configure an output to report a concentration measurement process variable, API Referral, or Advance Phase Measurement process variable, ensure that the concentration measurement application, API Referral, or Advance Phase Measurement application respectively, is configured so that the desired variable is available.
Procedure
Set mA Output Process Variable as desired.
Default: Mass Flow Rate
Postrequisites
If you change the configuration of mA Output Source , verify the settings of Lower Range Value and Upper
Range Value . The transmitter automatically loads a set of values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
98 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Options for mA Output Source
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for mA Output Source , plus several application-specific options. Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Label
Process variable
Display
Standard
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Gas standard volume flow rate
Temperature
Density
External pressure
External temperature
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
GSV Flow Rate
Temperature
Density
External Pressure
External Temperature
Diagnostics
Velocity
Two-phase flow detection
Drive gain
API Referral
Temperature-corrected density
Temperature-corrected
(standard) volume flow rate
Average temperaturecorrected density
Velocity
Phase
Drive Gain
Referred Density
Referred Volume Flow
Average Line Density
Average temperature
Concentration measurement
Average Temperature
Density at reference Referred Density
ProLink III
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume Flow
Rate
Temperature
Density
External Pressure
External Temperature
Velocity
Phase Flow Severity
Drive Gain
Density at Reference
Temperature
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Average Density
Average Temperature
Web browser
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume Flow
Temperature
Density
External pressure
External temperature
Approximate Velocity
Phase Genius
Drive Gain
Density at Reference
Temperature
Referred Volume Flow Rate
Average Observed Density
Average Temperature
Dens at Ref (CM)
Specific gravity Specific Gravity
Standard volume flow rate Standard Vol Flow
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Concentration
Baume
Net Mass Flow
Net Volume Flow Rate
Concentration
Baume
Density at Reference
Temperature
Density (Fixed SG Units)
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Net Mass Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Concentration
Baume
Spec Gravity (CM)
Stnadard Volume Flow Rate
Net Mass Flow (CM)
Net Volume Flow Rate (CM)
Concentration (CM)
Baume (CM)
Configuration and Use Manual 99
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
8.4.2 Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value
(URV) for an mA Output
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Lower Range Value Menu →
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Upper Range Value
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Lower Range Value
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Upper Range Value
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → mA Output → Lower Range Value
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → mA Output → Upper Range Value
The Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) are used to scale an mA Output, that is, to define the relationship between mA Output Process Variable and the mA Output signal.
LRV is the value of mA Output Source represented by an output of 4 mA. URV is the value of mA Output
Source represented by an output of 20 mA. Between LRV and URV , an mA Output is linear with the process variable. If the process variable drops below LRV or rises above URV , the transmitter posts an output saturation alert.
Procedure
Set LRV and URV as desired.
Enter LRV and URV in the measurement units used for mA Output Source .
• Defaults: Specific to each process variable
• Range: Unlimited
Note
You can set URV below LRV . For example, you can set URV to 50 and LRV to 100 . If you do this, an mA Output will be inversely proportional to the value of mA Output Source .
8.4.3 Configure mA Output Direction
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Direction
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Direction
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → mA Output → Direction mA Output Direction controls how conditions of forward flow and reverse flow affect the flow rates reported by an mA Output.
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
100 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Table 8-1: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Actual flow direction
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow on sensor)
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on sensor)
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and totalizers
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
Procedure
Set mA Output Direction as desired.
Option Description
Normal (default) Appropriate when your application needs to distinguish between forward flow and reverse flow.
Absolute Value Appropriate when your application does not need to distinguish between forward flow and reverse flow.
Important mA Output Direction interacts with Lower Range Value (LRV). The effect of mA Output Direction on an mA
Output varies, depending on whether LRV < 0 or LRV ≥ 0.
Related information
Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Effect of mA Output Direction on an mA Output
mA Output Direction affects how the transmitter reports flow values via an mA Output. An mA Output is affected by mA Output Direction only if mA Output Source is set to a flow variable.
The effect of mA Output Direction depends on the setting of Lower Range Value (LRV).
• If Lower Range Value
.
• If Lower Range Value > 0, see
Figure 8-1 and adapt the chart.
• If Lower Range Value < 0, see
Configuration and Use Manual 101
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Figure 8-1: Effect of mA Output Direction on an mA Output: Lower Range Value = 0 mA Output Direction = Normal mA Output Direction = Absolute Value
20 20
12 12
4 4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
• Lower Range Value = 0
• Upper Range Value = x
Figure 8-2: Effect of mA Output Direction on an mA Output: Lower Range Value < 0 mA Output Direction = Normal mA Output Direction = Absolute Value
20 20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
• Lower Range Value = − x
• Upper Range Value = x
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
102 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Example: mA Output Direction = Normal and Lower Range Value = 0
Configuration:
• mA Output Direction = Normal
• Lower Range Value = 0 g/sec
• Upper Range Value = 100 g/sec
Result:
• Under conditions of reverse flow or zero flow, an mA Output is 4 mA.
• Under conditions of forward flow, up to a flow rate of 100 g/sec, an mA Output varies between 4 mA and
20 mA in proportion to the flow rate.
• Under conditions of forward flow, if the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, an mA Output will be proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
Example: mA Output Direction = Normal and Lower Range Value < 0
Configuration:
• mA Output Direction = Normal
• Lower Range Value = − 100 g/sec
• Upper Range Value = +100 g/sec
Result:
• Under conditions of zero flow, an mA Output is 12 mA.
• Under conditions of forward flow, for flow rates between 0 and +100 g/sec, an mA Output varies between
12 mA and 20 mA in proportion to (the absolute value of) the flow rate.
• Under conditions of forward flow, if (the absolute value of) the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, an mA Output is proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, for flow rates between 0 and − 100 g/sec, an mA Output varies between
4 mA and 12 mA in inverse proportion to the absolute value of the flow rate.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, if the absolute value of the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, an mA
Output is inversely proportional to the flow rate down to 3.8 mA, and will be level at 3.8 mA at higher absolute values.
8.4.4 Configure mA Output Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → MAO Cutoff
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output x → Flow Rate Cutoff
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → mA Output → Flow Rate Cutoff mA Output Cutoff specifies the lowest flow rate that will be reported through an mA Output. All flow rates below the specified value are reported as 0.
mA Output Cutoff is applicable only when mA Output Source is set to a flow rate variable. It is applied to whatever flow variable is assigned to an mA Output.
Configuration and Use Manual 103
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Procedure
Set mA Output Cutoff as desired.
Set mA Output Cutoff in the measurement units used for the process variable. If you change the measurement unit, mA Output Cutoff is adjusted automatically.
• Default: 0
• Range: 0 or any positive value
Tip
For most applications the default value of mA Output Cutoff should be used. Contact customer service before changing mA Output Cutoff .
Interaction between mA Output Cutoff and process variable cutoffs
When mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable (for example, mass flow rate or volume flow rate), mA Output Cutoff interacts with Mass Flow Cutoff or Volume Flow Cutoff . The transmitter puts the cutoff into effect at the highest flow rate at which a cutoff is applicable.
8.4.5 Configure mA Output Damping
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → MAO Damping
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Added Damping
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → mA Output → Added Damping mA Output Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the mA Output.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the value reported by an mA Output will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
mA Output Damping affects a process variable only when it is reported via the mA Output. If the process variable is read from the display or digitally, mA Output Damping is not applied.
Procedure
Set mA Output Damping to the desired value.
• Default: 0.0 seconds
• Range: 0.0 to 440 seconds
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in the process variable assigned to an mA Output can result in increased measurement error.
104 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the damped value will lag the actual measurement because the damped value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the damped value.
Interaction between mA Output Damping and process variable damping
When mA Output Source is set to a flow rate variable, density, or temperature, mA Output Damping interacts with Flow Damping , Density Damping , or Temperature Damping . If multiple damping parameters are applicable, the effect of damping the process variable is calculated first, and the mA Output damping calculation is applied to the result of that calculation.
Example: Damping interaction
Configuration:
• Flow Damping = 1 second
• mA Output Source = Mass Flow Rate
• mA Output Damping = 2 seconds
Result: A change in the mass flow rate will be reflected in the mA Output over a time period that is greater than 3 seconds. The exact time period is calculated by the transmitter according to internal algorithms which are not configurable.
8.4.6 Configure mA Output Fault Action
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Fault Action
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output x → Fault Action
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → mA Output → Fault Action mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA Output if the transmitter detects a fault condition.
Important
• The fault action is implemented only if Alert Severity is set to Failure. If Alert Severity is set to any other option, the fault action is not implemented.
• For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1. Set mA Output Fault Action as desired.
Default: Downscale
Important
If you set mA Output Fault Action to None, the mA Output will be controlled by the setting of Process
Variable Fault Action . In most cases, if you set mA Output Fault Action to None, you should also set
Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Configuration and Use Manual 105
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2. If you set mA Output Fault Action to Upscale or Downscale , set mA Output Fault Level to the signal that the mA Output will produce during a fault.
Options for mAO Fault Action and mAO Fault Level
Option
Upscale mA Output behavior
Goes to the configured fault level mA Output Fault Level
Default: 22.0 mA
Range: 21.0 to 23.0 mA
Downscale (default)
Internal Zero
None
Goes to the configured fault level
Goes to the mA Output level associated with a process variable value of 0 (zero), as determined by Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value settings
Determined by the setting of Process Variable
Fault Action
Not applicable
Not applicable
8.5 Configure a Frequency Output
Use a Frequency Output to report current values of process variables. The frequency varies between 0 Hz and
14500 Hz in proportion to the current value of the assigned process variable.
8.5.1 Configure Frequency Output Source
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Type → Frequency Output
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → Frequency Output
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Frequency Output
Frequency Output Source specifies the process variable that is reported by the Frequency Output.
Prerequisites
• If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set Volume Flow Type as desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
• If you plan to configure an output to report a concentration measurement process variable, ensure that the concentration measurement application is configured so that the desired variable is available.
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Source as desired.
Default: Mass Flow Rate
Postrequisites
If you change the configuration of Frequency Output Source , verify the Frequency Output scaling. The transmitter automatically loads the most recent values for the scaling parameters, and they may not be appropriate for your application.
106 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Related information
Configure Frequency Output Scaling
Options for Frequency Output Source
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for Frequency Output Source , plus several application-specific options. Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Label
Process variable
Display
Standard
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Gas standard volume flow rate
API Referral
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
GSV Flow Rate
Temperature-corrected
(standard) volume flow rate
Concentration measurement
Referred Volume Flow
Standard volume flow rate Standard Vol Flow
PLIII
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume Flow
Rate
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Web browser
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
GSV Flow Rate
Referred Volume Flow Rate
Standard Volume Flow Rate
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Net Mass Flow
Net Volume Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Net Mass Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Net Mass Flow (CM)
Net Volume Flow Rate (CM)
8.5.2 Configure Frequency Output Scaling
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Scaling Method
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output → Scaling Method
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Frequency Output → Scaling Method
Frequency output scaling defines the relationship between Frequency Output Source and the pulse of the
Frequency Output. Scale the Frequency Output to provide the data in the form required by your frequency receiving device.
Procedure
1. Set Frequency Output Scaling Method .
Option
Frequency=Flow (default)
Pulses/Unit
Units/Pulse
Description
Frequency calculated from flow rate
A user-specified number of pulses represents one flow unit
A pulse represents a user-specified number of flow units
2. Set additional required parameters.
Configuration and Use Manual 107
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Frequency=Flow, set Rate Factor and Frequency
Factor .
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Pulses/Unit, define the number of pulses that will represent one flow unit.
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Units/Pulse, define the number of units that each pulse will indicate.
Calculate frequency from flow rate
The Frequency=Flow option is used to customize the Frequency Output for your application when you do not know appropriate values for Units/Pulse or Pulses/Unit.
If you specify Frequency=Flow, you must provide values for Rate Factor and Frequency Factor :
Rate Factor The maximum flow rate that you want the Frequency Output to report.
Frequency Factor A value calculated as follows:
× N where:
T Factor to convert selected time base to seconds
N Number of pulses per flow unit, as configured in the receiving device
The resulting Frequency Factor must be within the range of the Frequency Output :
• If Frequency Factor is less than 1 Hz, reconfigure the receiving device for a higher pulses/unit setting.
Example: Configure Frequency=Flow
You want the Frequency Output to report all flow rates up to 2000 kg/min.
The frequency receiving device is configured for 10 pulses/kg.
Solution:
× N
FrequencyFactor = 333.33
Set parameters as follows:
• Rate Factor : 2000
• Frequency Factor : 333.33
108 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
8.5.3 Configure Frequency Output Direction
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel x → I/O Settings → Direction
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output → Direction
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Frequency Output → Direction
Frequency Output Direction controls how conditions of forward flow and reverse flow affect the flow rates reported by the Frequency Output.
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
Table 8-2: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Actual flow direction
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow on sensor)
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on sensor)
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and totalizers
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Direction as desired.
Option Description
Positive Flow Only • Forward flow: The Frequency Output reports the flow rate according to the configured scaling method.
• Reverse flow: The Frequency Output is 0 Hz.
Negative Flow
Only
• Forward flow: The Frequency Output is 0 Hz.
• Reverse flow: The Frequency Output reports the absolute value of the flow rate according to the configured scaling method.
Both Positive and
Negative Flow
The Frequency Output reports the absolute value of the flow rate according to the configured scaling method. It is not possible to distinguish between forward flow and reverse flow from the Frequency Output alone. This setting is typically used in combination with a discrete output configured to report flow direction.
Related information
Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Configure Discrete Output Source
Configuration and Use Manual 109
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
8.5.4 Configure Frequency Output Fault Action
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Fault Action
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output x → Fault Action
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Frequency Output → Fault Action
Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Frequency Output if the transmitter detects a fault condition.
Important
• The fault action is implemented only if Alert Severity is set to Failure. If Alert Severity is set to any other option, the fault action is not implemented.
• For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1. Set Frequency Output Fault Action as desired.
Default: Downscale
Important
If you set Frequency Output Fault Action to None, the Frequency Output will be controlled by the setting of Process Variable Fault Action . In most cases, if you set Frequency Output Fault Action to
None, you should also set Process Variable Fault Action to None.
2. If you set Frequency Output Fault Action to Upscale, set Frequency Fault Level to the desired value.
• Default: 14500 Hz
• Range: 10 Hz to 14500 Hz
Related information
Configure Process Variable Fault Action
Options for Frequency Output Fault Action
Label
Upscale
Downscale
Internal Zero
None (default)
Frequency Output behavior
Goes to configured Upscale value:
• Default: 14500 Hz
• Range: 10 Hz to 14500 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
Determined by the setting of Process Variable Fault Action
110 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
8.6 Configure a Discrete Output
Use a Discrete Output to report specific meter or process conditions.
8.6.1 Configure Discrete Output Source
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Source
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → Discrete Output
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Discrete Output
Discrete Output Source specifies the process condition or device condition that is reported by a Discrete
Output.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Source to the desired option.
Default: Forward/Reverse
Postrequisites
If you set Discrete Output Source to Flow Switch, additional configuration is required.
Related information
Options for Discrete Output Source
Option
Enhanced Event
Display
Basic Event x
Label
Prolink III
Enhanced Event x
Web browser
Enhanced Event x
State
ON
Discrete Output voltage
Flow Rate
Switch
Forward/
Reverse
Indicator
Enhanced Event x
Event x
Flow Rate
Switch
Flow Switch
Indicator
N/A
Flow Rate
Switch
Flow Direction Forward Reverse
Indicator
Flow Direction
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Forward flow
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
0 V
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
0 V
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
0 V
0 V
Configuration and Use Manual 111
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Option
Display
Label
Prolink III Web browser
State Discrete Output voltage
Calibration in
Progress
Zero in Progress Calibration in
Progress
Reverse flow
Zero in Progress ON
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
Fault
Smart Meter
Verification
Batch Primary
Valve
Fault
Smart Meter
Verification
Batch Primary
Valve
Fault Indication
Meter
Verification
Failure
Valve
Batch Primary
Fault
Smart Meter
Verification
Batch Primary
Valve
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0 V
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
0 V
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
0 V
• Internally powered: 24 VDC
• Externally powered: Sitespecific
OFF 0 V
(1) Events configured using the enhanced event model.
(2) Events configured using the basic event model.
(3) The ProLink III v4.0 option is “Meter Verification Failure” for the Discrete Output Source field. This does match the table entry.
Important
This table assumes that Discrete Output Polarity is set to Active High. If Discrete Output Polarity is set to
Active Low, reverse the voltage values.
Important
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
112 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Table 8-3: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Actual flow direction
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow on sensor)
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on sensor)
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and totalizers
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Forward
Related information
Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
8.6.2 Configure Discrete Output Polarity
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Polarity
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output → Polarity
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Discrete Output → Polarity
A Discrete Output has two states: ON (active, asserted) and OFF (inactive). Two different voltages are used to represent these states. Discrete Output Polarity controls which voltage represents which state.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Polarity as desired.
Default: Active High
8.6.3 Configure Discrete Output Fault Action
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Fault Action
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output → Fault Action
Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → Discrete Outputs → Fault Action
Discrete Output Fault Action controls the behavior of a Discrete Output if the transmitter detects a fault condition.
Important
• The fault action is implemented only if Alert Severity is set to Failure. If Alert Severity is set to any other option, the fault action is not implemented.
• For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
NOTICE
Do not use Discrete Output Source as a fault indicator. If you do, you may not be able to distinguish a fault condition from a normal operating condition. If you want to use the Discrete Output as a fault indicator, see
Fault indication with a Discrete Output
.
Configuration and Use Manual 113
Integrate the meter with the control system
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Fault Action as desired.
Default: None
Related information
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and other fault actions
Options for Discrete Output Fault Action
Label
Upscale
Downscale
None (default)
Discrete Output behavior
Polarity=Active High
• Fault: Discrete Output is ON (24 VDC or site-specific voltage)
• No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Polarity=Active Low
• Fault: Discrete Output is OFF (0 V
• No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
• Fault: Discrete Output is OFF (0 V
• No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
• Fault: Discrete Output is ON (24 VDC or site-specific voltage)
• No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Fault indication with a Discrete Output
To indicate faults via a Discrete Output, set Discrete Output Source to Fault. Then, if a fault occurs, the
Discrete Output is always ON and the setting of Discrete Output Fault Action is ignored.
114 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Set the Ethernet protocol
November 2022
9 Set the Ethernet protocol
The primary protocol is configured as either EtherNet/IP, or Modbus TCP at the factory per your transmitter's specifications. You can use the display, ProLink III, or the web server to change the factory primary protocol if necessary. The primary protocol determines the state of the LED.
Procedure
Navigate to the Primary Protocol field using one of the following tools:
Option
Display
ProLink III
Web server
Description
Menu → Configuration → Ethernet Settings → Network Settings
Device Tools → Configuration → Network Settings → Ethernet Protocol
Configuration → Ethernet Settings → Ethernet Protocol
Configuration and Use Manual 115
Set the Ethernet protocol
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
116 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
10 Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
10.1 TM-T88VI printer limitations
You can pair up to six 1600 Ethernet transmitters per one Epson TM-T88VI. With any additional connection attempts beyond six, the printer will reject the connection and trigger a functional check alert (printer offline) on the transmitter.
• Maximum simultaneous connections: 6
• Number of connections available for printing: 1
The other five connections must wait until the first print job is completed.
• Default connection time out: 90 seconds
This time out is adjustable using the EpsonNet Config application.
10.2 Set up the printer
Use this section to set up printing with a 1600 Ethernet transmitter and an Epson TM-T88VI Ethernet printer.
There are two ways to set up printing:
• Use the printer's default IP address
• Change the printer's default IP address
10.2.1 Set up the printer by changing the printer default IP address
Use this procedure to set up printing with a 1600 Ethernet transmitter and an Epson TM-T88VI printer by changing the printer's default IP address.
Procedure
1. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable and power supply to the printer.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the PC.
3. Power on the printer.
The printer IP address prints after a few minutes.
4. Temporarily change the Ethernet address for the PC so that the Ethernet is on the same subnet as the printer:
Default IP address = 192.168.192.168
a) From Windows 10, right-click the Start button and select Network Connections .
b) Right-click the Ethernet connection and select Properties .
Select Yes on any user account pop-up windows.
c) Select Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IPv4) , then select Properties .
Configuration and Use Manual 117
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600 d) Select Use the following IP address and configure the IP address and subnet mask as follows:
• IP address: 192.168.192.
x , where x is something other than 0, 1, or 168
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
e) Select OK .
5. Change the printer firmware options.
a) Open your web browser and type http://192.168.192.168
(default printer IP).
The browser displays, Your connection is not private . Ignore the warning and proceed to the website.
b) Select ADVANCED .
c) Select Proceed to 192.168.192.168
.
d) At the login screen, enter:
Default username: epson
Default password: epson
The EpsonNet Config utility screen displays.
e) Select TCP/IP under the configuration settings (not the basic settings), listed on the left side of the screen.
f) Change the IP Address (i.e., 192.168.1.55), Subnet Mask , and Default Gateway based on your network. Select an IP address that is unique to the local network.
The printer must be on the same subnet as the 1600.
g) Required: Set Acquiring the IP Address to Manual.
h) Select Send to save your settings.
i) Select Reset , or power cycle the printer when prompted to apply the changes.
6. Change the PC network settings back to the original settings.
Use the windows you used in
.
7. Configure the 1600 Ethernet transmitter for the printer.
a) Remove the Ethernet cable from the PC and connect it to the 1600 Ethernet transmitter.
b) If you have not already done so, configure the transmitter IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Display
ProLink III
Menu → Configuration → Ethernet Settings → Network Settings
Device Tools → Configuration → Network Settings
See Connect ProLink III to the transmitter
.
118 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022 c) Enter the printer IP address you configured in the previous step into the 1600 Ethernet transmitter.
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Printer → Printer IP address
Device Tools → Configuration → Printer and Tickets
Configuration → Printer and Tickets
8. Perform a test print to verify the settings are correct.
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Operations → Printer → Print Ticket → Print Test Page
Device Tools → Configuration → Printer and Tickets
Configuration → Printer and Tickets
If needed, see Function Check Failed in the Status alerts, causes, and recommendations section.
10.2.2 Set up the printer using the printer default IP address
Use this procedure to set up printing with a 1600 Ethernet transmitter and an Epson TM-T88VI printer using the printer's default IP address.
Procedure
1. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable and power supply to the printer.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the PC.
3. Power on the printer.
It can take 1-2 minutes for the printer to finish configuring network settings. When complete, the following ticket prints.
*********************************
IP Address : 192.168.192.168
SubnetMask : 255.255.255.0
Gateway : 0.0.0.0 DHCP : No server - > Static
*********************************
4. Turn off DHCP if it is enabled.
From the display a. Go to Menu → Configuration → Ethernet
Settings → Network Settings → Auto obtain
IP(DHCP) .
b. Select Disabled and Save .
c. Back out to the Ethernet Settings page to apply the
DHCP off setting.
From ProLink III a. Go to Device Tools → Configuration → Network
Settings .
b. Uncheck Obtain an IP address automatically
(DHCP) .
c. Select Apply .
Configuration and Use Manual 119
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
5. Configure the IP address.
a) Navigate to one of the following screens:
From the display
Go to Menu → Configuration → Ethernet Settings
→ Network Settings → IP address .
From ProLink III
Go to Device Tools → Configuration → Network
Settings .
b) Set the IP address to 192.168.192.
x , where x is something other than 0, 1, or 168.
6. Configure the subnet mask.
a) Navigate to one of the following screens:
From the display
Go to Menu → Configuration → Ethernet Settings
→ Network Settings → Subnet Mask .
From ProLink III
Go to Device Tools → Configuration → Network
Settings .
b) Set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0
.
7. Configure the printer type.
a) Navigate to one of the following screens:
From the display
Go to Menu → Configuration → Printer → Printer
Type .
From ProLink III
Go to Device Tools → Configuration → Printer and
Tickets .
b) Verify that the IP address is 192.168.192.168.
10.3 Reset the interface settings
Use this procedure if you forgot the IP address of your printer and need to reset the default
(192.168.192.168).
Procedure
1. Turn off the printer and close the roll paper cover.
2. If the connector cover is attached, remove the cover.
3. Hold down the status sheet button on the back of the printer while turning on the printer.
A message displays indicating that resetting is being performed.
4. Release the status sheet button to reset the printer settings to default.
Important
Do not turn off power until the process is complete.
When complete, a Resetting to Factory Default Finished message displays.
120 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
10.4 Configure the printer and print tickets
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that all variables and units of precision are already configured.
Verify that you have the correct software versions and licenses.
Software or license version
ProLink III 4.2 or later
Transmitter software 1.0
or later
Where to look
From ProLink III, Help
• From the display: Menu → About → Versions → Transmitter Software
• From ProLink III, Device Tools → About → Versions → Transmitter Software
Procedure
1. Ensure that the transmitter is in unsecure mode in order to make the configuration changes for this procedure.
2. Configure the printer parameters.
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Printer
Device Tools → Configuration → Printer and Tickets
Not available
10.4.1 Printer, ticket, and heading parameters
Table 10-1: Printer configurable parameters
Ticket parameters
Printer Type
Description
• Epson TM-T88VI – Uses 3.15 in (80.0 mm) thermal paper rolls
• Generic – does not support the Paper Out function
Printer IP Address Default values:
Left Most Octet: 192
Left Middle Octet: 168
Right Middle Octet: 192
Right Most Octet: 168
Modify the default values based on the network using the printer.
Table 10-2: Ticket configurable parameters
Ticket parameters
Number of Batch Tickets
Description
The number of batch tickets to be printed by the Auto Print function (if Auto
Print is enabled) or by a manual print request.
The default is 1.
Configuration and Use Manual 121
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table 10-2: Ticket configurable parameters (continued)
Ticket parameters
Auto Print
Description
• Select Yes to have batch tickets printed automatically at the end of each batch. Tickets will be printed only if flow is stopped.
• Select No to not have batch tickets printed automatically at the end of each batch.
Batch Count Start Number Starting ticket number for the batch count.
Table 10-3: Header Lines 1 — 2
Heading parameters Description
Text Enter the text for this line of the header. Enter up to 20 characters. Leave blank for no text.
Number of Line Feeds Configure the space between the current line and the following line by 1, 2, or 3 lines. Default is
1.
Font Size • Normal Height
• Double Height
10.5 Configure a discrete event
You can configure the 1600 so that a standard or batch ticket is printed automatically after a discrete event occurs.
Procedure
Configure the channel to print a ticket.
10.6 Ticket types
Tickets provide proof of what was purchased, as well as status summaries.
You can configure any of the following ticket types using varying methods.
Table 10-4: Ticket type descriptions
Ticket type
Standard
Batch
Description
Prints alerts and other maintenance occurrences for information only.
Standard tickets are not legal for trade.
Prints proof of batching operations.
• For some ticket types, you can include or exclude content.
• You can configure tickets to print automatically — for example, at certain points in a discrete batch, or when an event occurs.
• You can print tickets manually as needed using the display.
122 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
Table 10-5: Ticket types for special applications
Special applications
None
Discrete batch license
Standard
X
X
Available tickets
Batch
X
10.6.1 Print a standard ticket
You can print standard tickets using the display. You can also specify that tickets will be printed automatically if a discrete event occurs. You may use as many of these methods as desired.
Procedure
To print standard tickets from the display, select the ticket from Menu → Operations → Printer → Print
Ticket .
• Print None
• Print Process Screen
• Print Batch Ticket
• Print Config Data
• Print Alert History
• Print Active Alerts
• Print Audit Trail
• Print Test Page
For examples, see
Note
Print Audit Trail and Print Config Data tickets are long prints.
10.6.2 Print a batch ticket
Batch tickets provide proof of batching operations.
Procedure
1. To manually print a batch ticket, go to the display and navigate to Menu → Batcher → Run Batch →
Print Batch Ticket .
2. To configure the transmitter to automatically print batch tickets after a batch end:
• From the display, navigate to Menu → Configuration → Printer → Ticket Settings
• From ProLink III, navigate to Device Tools → Configuration → Batcher → Auto Print Ticket at
Batch End and select Yes.
3. You can also write a 1 to Modbus coil 383 to print a batch ticket.
Configuration and Use Manual 123
Configure, setup, and use a printer for tickets
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Batch ticket contents
Table 10-6: Batch ticket contents
Ticket type
Batch
Header lines
1 and 2
Standard ticket contents
• Batch data and time
• Only batch data
• Batch count
• Print timestamp
Figure 10-1: Batch ticket example
Conditional ticket contents
“Not Legal For Trade” banner
For more examples, see Example tickets
.
124 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Complete the configuration
November 2022
11 Complete the configuration
11.1 Test or tune the system using sensor simulation
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Service Tools → Sensor Simulation → Simulate Sensor
Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Sensor Simulation
Service Tools → Simulation → Sensor Simulation
Use sensor simulation to test the system's response to a variety of process conditions, including boundary conditions, problem conditions, or alert conditions, or to tune the loop.
Restriction
Sensor simulation is available only on flow meters with the enhanced core processor.
Prerequisites
Before enabling sensor simulation, ensure that your process can tolerate the effects of the simulated process values.
Procedure
1. Enable sensor simulation.
2. For mass flow, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
3. For density, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Configuration and Use Manual 125
Complete the configuration
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
4. For temperature, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
5. Observe the system response to the simulated values and make any appropriate changes to the transmitter configuration or to the system.
6. Modify the simulated values and repeat.
7. When you have finished testing or tuning, disable sensor simulation.
11.1.1 Sensor simulation
Sensor simulation allows you to test the system or tune the loop without having to create the test conditions in your process. When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports the simulated values for mass flow, density, and temperature, and takes all appropriate actions. For example, the transmitter might apply a cutoff, activate an event, or post an alert.
When sensor simulation is enabled, the simulated values are stored in the same memory locations used for process data from the sensor. The simulated values are then used throughout transmitter functioning. For example, sensor simulation will affect:
• All mass flow rate, temperature, and density values displayed or reported via outputs or digital communications
• The mass total and mass inventory values
• All volume calculations and data, including reported values, volume totals, and volume inventories
• All mass, temperature, density, or volume values logged to Data Logger
Sensor simulation does not affect any diagnostic values.
Unlike actual mass flow rate and density values, the simulated values are not temperature-compensated
(adjusted for the effect of temperature on the sensor’s flow tubes).
11.2 Enable or disable write-protection
Upper puck
ProLink III
Web browser
Use the mechanical switch on the upper puck.
Not available
Not available
126 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Complete the configuration
November 2022
When enabled, Write-Protection prevents changes to the transmitter configuration. You can perform all other functions, and you can view the transmitter configuration parameters.
Note
Write protection is available only by removing the display in order to access the upper puck component and using the lock switch to set the switch ON.
Figure 11-1: Removing the transmitter housing cover
A. Display Component
B. Upper Puck Component
Configuration and Use Manual 127
Complete the configuration
November 2022
Figure 11-2: Setting Switch 1 ON (to the left) to Set Write-Protection
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
A. Switch 1
Write-protecting the transmitter primarily prevents accidental changes to configuration, not intentional changes. Any user who can make changes to the configuration can disable write protection.
128 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Transmitter operation
November 2022
12 Transmitter operation
12.1 View process and diagnostic variables
Process variables provide information about the state of the process fluid. Diagnostic variables provide data about device operation. You can use this data to monitor and troubleshoot your process.
12.1.1 View process and diagnostic variables using the display
The display reports the name of the variable (for example, Density ), the current value of the variable, and the associated unit of measure (for example, kg/m 3 ).
Prerequisites
For a process or diagnostic variable to be viewed using the display, it must be configured as a display variable.
Procedure
• If Auto Scroll is not enabled, activate ⇩ or ⇧ to move through the list of display variables.
• If Auto Scroll is enabled, wait until the variable is displayed automatically. If you do not want to wait, you can activate ⇩ or ⇧ to force the display to scroll.
12.1.2 View process variables and other data using ProLink III
Monitor process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data to maintain process quality.
ProLink III automatically displays process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data on the main screen.
Tip
ProLink III allows you to choose the process variables that appear on the main screen. You can also choose whether to view data in Analog Gauge view or digital view, and you can customize the gauge settings. For more information, see the Prolink III user manual .
12.1.3 View process variables and other data using a web browser
Monitor process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data to maintain process quality.
When you log in to the transmitter with a web browser, the Process Monitor page automatically displays process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data. You can change which variables appear on the page.
Procedure
1. Click Change Displayed Variables .
2. Make a new selection for each display variable you want to change.
3. Click Apply .
Configuration and Use Manual 129
Transmitter operation
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
12.1.4 Effect of Sensor Flow Direction Arrow on digital communications
Flow rates on the transmitter display or reported via digital communications are shown as positive or negative. The sign depends on the interaction between Sensor Flow Direction Arrow and the actual flow direction.
This interaction affects flow rates shown on the transmitter display, ProLink III, and all other user interfaces.
Actual flow direction
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow on sensor)
Reverse (opposite from
Flow arrow on sensor)
Setting of Sensor Flow
Direction Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
With Arrow
Against Arrow
Transmitter display
Positive (no sign)
Negative
Negative
Positive (no sign)
Flow rate value
Digital communications
Positive
Negative
Negative
Positive
12.2 View and acknowledge status alerts
The transmitter posts a status alert whenever one of the specified conditions occurs. You can view active alerts and you can acknowledge alerts. You do not have to acknowledge alerts: The transmitter will perform normal measurement and reporting functions with unacknowledged alerts.
12.2.1 View and acknowledge alerts using the display
You can view information about all active or unacknowledged alerts, and you can acknowledge alerts.
The display uses the alert banner and the alert symbol ⓘ to provide information about alerts.
Table 12-1: Alert information on display
Display status
Alert banner
Alert symbol ⓘ
Cause
One or more alerts are active.
One or more alerts are unacknowledged.
User action
Resolve the conditions to clear the alert. When the alert is cleared or acknowledged, the banner will be removed.
Acknowledge the alert. When all alerts are acknowledged, the alert icon will be removed.
If alert security is enabled, the alert banner is never displayed. To view detailed information, you must use the alert menu: Menu → (i) Alert List .
Note
Certain alerts do not clear until the transmitter is rebooted.
Procedure
• If the alert banner appears: a) Activate Info to view information about the alert.
b) Take appropriate steps to clear the alert.
c) Activate Ack to acknowledge the alert.
130 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Transmitter operation
November 2022
• If ⓘ appears: a) Choose Menu → (i) Alert List .
b) Select an alert to view more information about the specific alert or to acknowledge it individually.
c) Choose Acknowledge All Alerts to acknowledge all alerts on the list.
12.2.2 View and acknowledge alerts using ProLink III
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged. From this list, you can acknowledge individual alerts or choose to acknowledge all alerts at once.
Note
Certain alerts do not clear until the transmitter is rebooted.
Procedure
1. View alerts on the ProLink III main screen under Alerts .
All active or unacknowledged alerts are listed. Take appropriate steps to clear all active alerts.
2. To acknowledge a single alert, check the Ack check box for that alert. To acknowledge all alerts at once, select Ack All .
12.2.3 View alerts using a web browser
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged. From this list, you can acknowledge individual alerts or choose to acknowledge all alerts at once.
Active alerts automatically appear on the Process Monitor page when you log in to the transmitter from a web browser.
Note
Certain alerts do not clear until the transmitter is rebooted.
Procedure
1. Choose Alerts to display the Alerts page.
Alerts are shown in the Active Alert List .
2. For inactive alerts click Alert History to view them in the browser, or click Download Full Alert History to generate a text file that you can download to your PC.
12.3 Read totalizer and inventory values
Display
ProLink III
Menu → Operations → Totalizers → See Totals
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories
Totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last totalizer reset. Inventories keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last inventory reset.
Configuration and Use Manual 131
Transmitter operation
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
12.4 Start, stop, and reset totalizers and inventories
When a totalizer or inventory is started, its value increases or decreases depending on the interaction of the flow direction parameters. It continues tracking flow until it is stopped.
When a totalizer or inventory is reset, its value is set to 0. You can reset a totalizer or inventory while it is started or while it is stopped.
• You can start, stop, or reset each totalizer or inventory independently.
• You can start, stop, or reset all totalizers and inventories as a group.
12.4.1 Start, stop, and reset totalizers using the display
Prerequisites
To stop, start, or reset a single totalizer or inventory, the totalizer or inventory must be configured as a display variable.
To reset an inventory using the display, this function must be enabled. To enable inventory reset using the display, choose Menu → Configuration → Security and set Totalizer Reset to Allowed. Note that this affects only the display functions. Resetting inventories using other tools is not affected.
Procedure
• To start or stop a single totalizer or inventory: a) Wait or scroll until the totalizer or inventory appears on the display.
b) Choose Options .
c) Choose Start or Stop .
• To start or stop all totalizers and inventories as a group: a) Choose Menu → Operations → Totalizers .
b) Choose Start or Stop .
• To reset a single totalizer or inventory: a) Wait or scroll until the totalizer or inventory appears on the display.
b) Choose Options .
c) Choose Reset .
• To reset all totalizers and inventories as a group: a) Choose Menu → Operations → Totalizers .
b) Choose Reset All .
12.4.2 Start, stop, and reset totalizers using ProLink III
Prerequisites
To reset an inventory using ProLink III, this function must be enabled. To enable inventory reset using ProLink
III, choose Tools → Options and enable Reset Inventories from ProLink III . Note that this affects only ProLink
III. Resetting inventories using other tools is not affected.
132 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Transmitter operation
November 2022
Procedure
• To start or stop a single totalizer: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers .
b) Scroll to the totalizer that you want to start or stop, and click Start or Stop .
• To start or stop a single inventory: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories .
b) Scroll to the inventory that you want to start or stop, and click Start or Stop .
• To start or stop all totalizers as a group: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers or Device Tools → Totalizer Control →
Inventories .
b) Select Start All Totals or Stop All Totals .
• To reset a single totalizer: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers .
b) Scroll to the totalizer that you want to reset, and click Reset .
• To reset a single inventory: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories .
b) Scroll to the inventory that you want to reset, and click Reset .
• To reset all totalizers as a group: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers .
b) Select Reset All Totals .
• To reset all inventories as a group: a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories .
b) Select Reset All Inventories .
12.4.3 Start, stop, and reset totalizers using a web browser
You can start and stop each totalizer or inventory independently. You can start and stop all totalizers as a group. You can reset each totalizer or inventory independently. You can reset all totalizers as a group. You can reset all inventories as a group.
When a totalizer or inventory is started, its value increases or decreases depending on the interaction of the flow direction parameters. It continues tracking flow until it is stopped.
When a totalizer or inventory is reset, its value is set to 0. You can reset a totalizer or inventory while it is started or while it is stopped.
Procedure
• To start, stop, or reset totalizers: a) Choose Operations → Totalizers .
b) Choose from the available operations.
Configuration and Use Manual 133
Transmitter operation
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Option
Start
Stop
Reset
Start all Totalizers
Stop all Totalizers
Reset all Totalizers
Description
Start an individual totalizer.
Stop an individual totalizer.
Reset an individual totalizer to zero.
Start all totalizers at the same time.
Stop all totalizers at the same time.
Reset all totalizers to zero at the same time.
• To start, stop, or reset inventories: a) Choose Operations → Inventories .
b) Choose from the available operations.
Option
Start
Stop
Reset
Reset all Inventories
Description
Start an individual inventory.
Stop an individual inventory.
Reset an individual inventory to zero.
Resets all inventories to zero the same time.
134 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Operation using the batcher
November 2022
13 Operation using the batcher
13.1 Run a batch
You can run a batch using any of the presets that are enabled. You can change the target for the current batch. You can pause and resume a batch in process. You can allow the batch to complete normally or you can end it manually.
Restriction
Presets are not available when using a web browser for configuration.
Prerequisites
The preset that you want to use must be enabled.
Procedure
1. Select the preset you want to use.
Option
Display
ProLink III
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch and set Active Preset to the preset you want to use.
Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Batcher and set Current Preset Number to the preset you want to use.
Web browser Not available.
The preset contains parameters that control batch processing.
2. If desired, change the configured target to the target to be used for this batch only.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Current Preset Number to the preset you want to use, and set Batch Target to the desired value.
ProLink III Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher and set Current Target to the desired value.
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and set Current Preset Number to the preset you want to use.
You cannot set the target to a value that is greater than the Maximum Target value configured for the batching application.
Changing the target here does not change the target configured in the preset.
Configuration and Use Manual 135
Operation using the batcher
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
3. Begin the batch.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Begin .
ProLink III Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batch and select Begin Batch .
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and select Begin Batch .
The transmitter automatically resets the batch total to 0 if you have selected Reset on Start .
Otherwise, you must manually reset the batch total before the batch will start.
Reset on Start is not applicable for custody transfer batcher applications.
4. Monitor the batch during processing.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and observe the value displayed in Actual Total .
ProLink III Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher and observe the values displayed in Current Total and Batch Time .
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and observe the values displayed in
Current Total and Batch Time .
5. Optional: Pause the batch at any time.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Pause .
ProLink III Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher and select Pause
Batcher .
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and select Pause Batch .
Pausing a batch allows you to resume it later.
6. Optional: Resume the batch after it has been paused.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Resume .
ProLink III Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Resume .
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and select Resume Batch .
136 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Operation using the batcher
November 2022
7. Optional: End the batch manually at any time before it reaches the target.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select End .
ProLink III Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher and select End Batch .
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and select End Batch .
If you end a batch manually, you will not be able to resume it. You can end the batch while it is running and while it is paused.
8. If you did not end the batch manually, wait until the batch ends automatically.
Option
Display
Description
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control .
ProLink III Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher .
Web browser Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher and select End Batch .
The batch ends automatically when it reaches the target or when it reaches the configured maximum fill time.
9. Optional: Inhibit batch.
Option
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Description
Not available
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher .
Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher .
While the Inhibit Batch input is active, a batch will not be allowed to start. Attempting to start a batch while the batch is inhibited will cause the Start Not Okay alarm to be posted.
10. Optional: Inhibit totalizer.
Option
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Description
Not available
Choose
Choose
Device Tools
Operations →
→ Application Control
Batcher →
→
Run Batcher .
Run Batcher .
When the Inhibit Totalizer input is active, the Batch Total will not increment. A timeout alarm will occur if the Batch Total is inhibited beyond the max batch time. The batch inventory for the current preset will not increment while Inhibit Totalizer is active.
Configuration and Use Manual 137
Operation using the batcher
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
11. Optional: Inhibit flow.
Option
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Description
Not available
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher .
Choose Operations → Batcher → Run Batcher .
When the Inhibit Flow input is active, the batch will ignore the flow rate of the assigned flow source, allowing a batch to end. The batch total will not increment when flow is inhibited.
13.2 Perform AOC calibration
AOC calibration “trains” the AOC algorithm to adjust for your network speed and valve closure speed. AOC calibration is required only if AOC Compensation Mode is set to AOC Algorithm.
There are two options for AOC calibration:
• Calculate and save: When you are satisfied with the results of AOC calibration, you can save the current
AOC coefficient. It will be used for all batches.
• Rolling calibration: The AOC coefficient is recalculated for each batch, based on the results of the most recent batches.
Prerequisites
Compensation Mode must be set to AOC.
13.2.1 Perform AOC calibration using the display
Procedure
• To calculate and save an AOC coefficient: a) Choose Menu → Operations → Batcher → AOC Calibration .
b) Set AOC Cal Status to On.
c) Run several batches, allowing each batch to run to completion, and observe the totals.
d) When batch repeatability meets requirements, set AOC Cal Status to Off.
AOC calibration is stopped, and the current coefficient is saved.
Important
If you are using a saved value, repeat AOC calibration:
— Whenever the fluid characteristics change, especially viscosity
— Whenever you change any configuration parameter that can affect flow measurement (e.g., damping)
138 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Operation using the batcher
November 2022
• To set up rolling calibration: a) Choose Menu → Operations → Batcher → AOC Calibration .
b) Set AOC Window to the number of batches that the rolling AOC coefficient will be based on.
c) Set AOC Cal Status to On.
Important
If you are using rolling calibration, and fluid characteristics change or the transmitter configuration changes, the transmitter will automatically adjust to the new conditions after a few batches.
13.2.2 Perform AOC calibration using ProLink III
Procedure
• To calculate and save an AOC coefficient: a) Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher .
b) Click Start AOC Calibration .
c) Run several batches, allowing each batch to run to completion, and observe the totals.
d) When batch repeatability meets requirements, click Save AOC Calibration .
AOC calibration is stopped, and the current coefficient is saved.
Important
If you are using a saved value, repeat AOC calibration:
— Whenever the fluid characteristics change, especially viscosity
— Whenever you change any configuration parameter that can affect flow measurement (e.g., damping)
• To set up rolling calibration: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Batcher .
b) Set AOC Window Length to the number of batches that the rolling AOC coefficient will be based on.
c) Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher .
d) Click Start AOC Calibration .
Important
If you are using rolling calibration, and fluid characteristics change or the transmitter configuration changes, the transmitter will automatically adjust to the new conditions after a few batches.
13.2.3 Perform AOC calibration using a web browser
Procedure
• To calculate and save an AOC coefficient: a) Choose Operations → Run Batcher → AOC Calibration .
b) Select Start AOC Calibration .
Configuration and Use Manual 139
Operation using the batcher
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600 c) Run several batches, allowing each batch to run to completion, and observe the totals.
d) When batch repeatability meets requirements, click Save AOC Calibration .
AOC calibration is stopped, and the current coefficient is saved.
Important
If you are using a saved value, repeat AOC calibration:
— Whenever the fluid characteristics change, especially viscosity
— Whenever you change any configuration parameter that can affect flow measurement (e.g., damping)
140 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
14 Measurement support
14.1 Use Smart Meter Verification
Smart Meter Verification ™ provides in-process flow meter health verification by analyzing the meter components related to measurement performance. You can run Smart Meter Verification without stopping the process. Use this section to run a Smart Meter Verification test, view and interpret the results, set up automatic execution, and check if a field reference point has been established.
14.1.1 Smart Meter Verification capabilities
Capability
Calibration coefficients audit
Zero audit
Electronics verification
Automatic test scheduler
History of previous 20 results
Verification report
Non-uniform coating diagnostic
Multiphase diagnostic
Flow range diagnostic
(1) Create and export with ProLink III, web page, or AMS SNAP-ON.
(2) 24-hour historian visualization in ProLink III Professional.
Basic
Included
●
●
●
●
●
Professional
90-day trial, licensed
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
14.1.2 Run a Smart Meter Verification test
Run a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test to diagnose the flow meter (and flow meter system) and verify if the flow meter is functioning properly and performing within factory specifications.
Important
Run the first Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test when the flow meter is installed in the pipeline and the flow meter is at its normal operating conditions.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using the display
Procedure
already.
2. Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Run Verification .
3. Select the desired output behavior.
Configuration and Use Manual 141
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Option
Fix at Last
Measured Value
Description
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Fix at Fault During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
The test starts immediately.
4. Wait for the test to complete.
Note
At any time during the process, you can abort the test. If the outputs were fixed, they will return to normal behavior.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using ProLink III Basic or Professional
Procedure
already.
2. Run Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional using ProLink III Basic or Professional:
• Smart Meter Verification Basic: Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Basic Meter
Verification
• Smart Meter Verification Professional: Smart Meter Verification Overview → Meter Verification →
Run Verification
• Smart Meter Verification Professional: Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Run
Test
3. In the SMV Test Definition window, enter any desired information and click Next .
None of this information is required. It does not affect Smart Meter Verification processing.
ProLink III stores this information in the Smart Meter Verification database on the PC. It is not saved to the transmitter.
4. Select the desired output behavior.
Option
Fix at Last
Measured Value
Fix at Fault
Description
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
5. Select Start and wait for the test to complete.
Note
At any time during the process, you can abort the test. If the outputs were fixed, they will return to normal behavior.
142 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using a web browser
Procedure
already.
2. Choose Service Tools → Smart Meter Verification → Run Meter Verification .
3. Select the desired output behavior.
Option
Fix at Last
Measured Value
Fix at Fault
Description
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
4. Select Start and wait for the test to complete.
Note
At any time during the process, you can abort the test. If the outputs were fixed, they will return to normal behavior.
14.1.3 View Smart Meter Verification test results
When the Smart Meter Verification Basic test is complete, a pass/fail result is displayed. With Smart Meter
Verification Professional, detailed results and reports are available.
Note
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, the twenty most recent results are available. If viewed using
ProLink III Basic or Professional, results for all tests that are in the PC database are available.
View Smart Meter Verification test results using the display
Results of the current Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test display automatically after the test is complete.
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, use the following procedure to view previous test results.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Read Verification History .
2. To view detailed data for an individual test, select it from the list.
View Smart Meter Verification test results using ProLink III Basic or
Professional
Results of the current Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test display automatically after the test is complete.
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, use the following procedure to view previous test results.
Configuration and Use Manual 143
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
To generate a previous test report, the Smart Meter Verification Professional test must have been run on the current PC in use.
Procedure
1. Choose one of the following options:
• Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → View Previous Test Results
• Smart Meter Verification Overview → Meter Verification → History
2. To view details, choose the results of interest: Show Report (or Next to show the report).
ProLink III displays a report containing details of the most recent tests. The report is automatically saved to the Smart Meter Verification database. You can print or export the report.
View Smart Meter Verification test results using a web browser
Results of the current Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test display automatically after the test is complete.
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, use the following procedure to view previous test results.
Procedure
1. Choose Service Tools → Smart Meter Verification → Meter Verification History .
2. Under Meter Verification History , select + in the row next to the test date you want to view.
Interpreting Smart Meter Verification results
When the Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test is completed, the result is reported as Pass, Fail, or Abort. (Some tools report the Fail result as Advisory instead.)
Pass The meter is performing within factory specifications.
Abort When you execute a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test, the test performs a selfdiagnostic check to ensure that the flow meter is stable prior to running the test. In the rare case that this check reveals an issue, Smart Meter Verification will report an abort code.
If you manually cancel an in-process Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test, the test result displays Abort Code 1: User-Initiated Abort . In this case, you can restart Smart
Meter Verification without any further action. In the rare case any other abort occurs, contact factory support.
In all cases where a Smart Meter Verification Professional test aborts, no report will be generated.
Fail
14.1.4 Resolve a failed Smart Meter Verification test
Use this procedure if a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test ran at normal operating conditions while conditions were stable and failed.
Procedure
1. Verify the sensor by performing a visual inspection, density verification, or field proving.
144 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
2. If possible, run Smart Meter Verification Professional with ProLink III Basic or Professional and save the results as follows:
• In a .csv
file
• In a report
• If the transmitter has a historian, retrieve the Smart Meter Verification results from the service or historian files.
3. Contact the factory for further evaluation and instructions.
14.1.5 Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution
You can execute a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test on demand or automatically schedule future runs. You can schedule future runs via two different options: as a single test at a user-defined future time, or automatically on a regular schedule.
Tip
The time between test runs must be between 1 and 1000 hours. The time for the first test run can be any positive floating number.
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution using the display
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Schedule Verification .
2. To schedule a single test: a) Set Hours to 1st Run to the number of hours to elapse before the test is run.
b) Set Hours Between to 0 .
3. To schedule a recurring execution: a) Set Specify Time Until Next Run to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse before the first test is run.
b) Set Specify Time Between Recurring Runs to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse between runs.
4. To disable scheduled execution: a) Set Specify Time Until Next Run to 0 days , 0 hours , and 0 minutes .
b) Set Specify Time Between Recurring Runs to 0 days , 0 hours , and 0 minutes .
Configuration and Use Manual 145
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution using ProLink III
Basic or Professional
Procedure
1. Select one of the following paths to access the Smart Meter Verification scheduler.
• ProLink III Basic or Professional: Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification →
Schedule Meter Verification .
• ProLink III Professional: Choose Smart Meter Verification Overview → Tools → Schedule Smart
Meter Verification .
2. To schedule a single test: a) Set Specify Time Until Next Run to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse before the test is run.
b) Set Specify Time Between Recurring Runs to 0 days , 0 hours , and 0 minutes .
3. To schedule a recurring execution: a) Set Specify Time Until Next Run to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse before the first test is run.
b) Set Specify Time Between Recurring Runs to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse between runs.
4. To disable scheduled execution, choose Disable Scheduled Execution .
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution using a web browser
Procedure
1. Choose Service Tools → Smart Meter Verification → → Schedule Meter Verification .
2. To schedule a single test: a) Set Hours Until Next Run to the number of hours to elapse before the test is run.
b) Set Hours Between Recurring Runs to 0 .
3. To schedule recurring execution: a) Set Hours Until Next Run to the number of hours to elapse before the first test is run.
b) Set Hours Between to the number of hours to elapse between runs.
4. To disable scheduled execution, choose Disable Scheduled Execution.
5. Select Apply .
Check for a field reference point
Use this procedure to check if a field reference point was created.
Prerequisites
• Smart Meter Verification Professional
146 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
• ProLink III Basic or Professional
Procedure
1. From ProLink III Basic or Professional, choose one of the following options:
• Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → View Previous Test Results
• Smart Meter Verification Overview → Meter Verification → History
2. Select Export Data to CSV File .
3. Save the CSV file to your computer.
4. Locate and open the CSV file.
5. Locate and examine the two columns labeled, SMV Meter Factor LPO and SMV Meter Factor RPO .
• If the field reference point has not been established, the numbers in both columns will be exactly 1.
• If the field reference point has been established, the numbers located in both columns will be close to 1. The SMV Meter Factor LPO and SMV Meter Factor RPO numbers do not have to match.
14.2 Zero the meter
Display
ProLink III
Menu → Service Tools → Verification & Calibration → Meter Zero → Zero Calibration
Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate Zero
Zeroing the meter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the meter unless one of the following is true:
• The zero is required by site procedures.
• The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
Prerequisites
Before performing a field zero, execute the zero verification procedure to see whether or not a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
Important
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
Procedure
1. Prepare the meter: a) Allow the meter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b) Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
Configuration and Use Manual 147
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600 c) Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d) Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
e) Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live
Zero or Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the meter.
2. Modify Zero Time , if desired.
Zero Time controls the amount of time the transmitter takes to determine its zero-flow reference point. The default Zero Time is 20 seconds. For most applications, the default Zero Time is appropriate.
3. Start the zero procedure and wait until it completes.
When the calibration is complete:
• If the zero procedure was successful, a Calibration Success message and a new zero value are displayed.
• If the zero procedure failed, a Calibration Failed message is displayed.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
Need help?
If the zero fails:
• Ensure that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
• Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
• Set Zero Time to a lower value, then retry.
• If the zero continues to fail, contact customer service.
• If you want to restore the most recent valid value from transmitter memory:
— Using the display: Menu → Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Meter Zero → Restore
Zero → Restore Previous Zero
— Using ProLink III: Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate
Zero → Restore Prior Zero
• If you want to restore the factory zero:
— Using the display: Menu → Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Meter Zero → Restore
Zero → Restore Factory Zero
— Using ProLink III: Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate
Zero → Restore Factory Zero
Restriction
Restore the factory zero only if your meter was purchased as a unit, it was zeroed at the factory, and you are using the original components.
148 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
Related information
14.2.1 Terminology used with zero verification and zero calibration
Term
Zero
Factory Zero
Field Zero
Prior Zero
Manual Zero
Live Zero
Zero Stability
Zero Calibration
Zero Time
Field Verification Zero
Zero Verification
Definition
In general, the offset required to synchronize the left pickoff and the right pickoff under conditions of zero flow. Unit = microseconds.
The zero value obtained at the factory, under laboratory conditions.
The zero value obtained by performing a zero calibration outside the factory.
The zero value stored in the transmitter at the time a field zero calibration is begun. May be the factory zero or a previous field zero.
The zero value stored in the transmitter, typically obtained from a zero calibration procedure. It may also be configured manually. Also called “mechanical zero” or “stored zero”.
The real-time bidirectional mass flow rate with no flow damping or mass flow cutoff applied. An adaptive damping value is applied only when the mass flow rate changes dramatically over a very short interval. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
A laboratory-derived value used to calculate the expected accuracy for a sensor. Under laboratory conditions at zero flow, the average flow rate is expected to fall within the range defined by the Zero Stability value (0 ± Zero Stability). Each sensor size and model has a unique Zero Stability value.
The procedure used to determine the zero value.
The time period over which the Zero Calibration procedure is performed. Unit = seconds.
A 3-minute running average of the Live Zero value, calculated by the transmitter. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
A procedure used to evaluate the stored zero and determine whether or not a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
14.3 Validate the meter
Display
ProLink III
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Meter
Factor
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Meter
Factor
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Meter Factor
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Rate Meter Factor
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Rate Meter Factor
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Meter Factor
Meter validation compares flow meter measurements reported by the transmitter to an external measurement standard. If the transmitter value for mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is significantly different from the external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding meter factor. The flow meter’s actual measurement is multiplied by the meter factor, and the resulting value is reported and used in further processing.
Configuration and Use Manual 149
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Prerequisites
Identify the meter factor(s) that you will calculate and set. You may set any combination of the three meter factors: mass flow, volume flow, and density. Note that all three meter factors are independent:
• The meter factor for mass flow affects only the value reported for mass flow.
• The meter factor for density affects only the value reported for density.
• The meter factor for volume flow affects only the value reported for volume flow or gas standard volume flow.
Important
To adjust volume flow, you must set the meter factor for volume flow. Setting a meter factor for mass flow and a meter factor for density will not produce the desired result. The volume flow calculations are based on original mass flow and density values, before the corresponding meter factors have been applied.
If you plan to calculate the meter factor for volume flow, be aware that validating volume in the field may be expensive, and the procedure may be hazardous for some process fluids. Therefore, because volume is inversely proportional to density, an alternative to direct measurement is to calculate the meter factor for volume flow from the meter factor for density. For instructions on this method, see
Alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow
.
Obtain a reference device (external measurement device) for the appropriate process variable.
Important
For good results, the reference device must be highly accurate.
Procedure
1. Determine the meter factor as follows: a) Use the flow meter to take a sample measurement.
b) Measure the same sample using the reference device.
c) Calculate the meter factor using the following formula:
NewMeterFactor = ConfiguredMeterFactor ×
ReferenceMeasurement
FlowmeterMeasurement
2. Ensure that the calculated meter factor does not fall outside 0.98 and 1.02. If the meter factor is outside these limits, contact customer service.
3. Configure the meter factor in the transmitter.
Calculating the meter factor for mass flow
The flow meter is installed and validated for the first time. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is 250.27 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250 lb. The mass flow meter factor is calculated as follows:
MeterFlow
MassFlow
The first meter factor for mass flow is 0.9989.
One year later, the flow meter is validated again. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is
250.07 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250.25 lb. The new mass flow meter factor is calculated as follows:
150 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
MeterFlow
MassFlow
The new meter factor for mass flow is 0.9996.
14.3.1 Alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow
The alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow is used to avoid the difficulties that may be associated with the standard method.
This alternate method is based on the fact that volume is inversely proportional to density. It provides partial correction of the volume flow measurement by adjusting for the portion of the total offset that is caused by the density measurement offset. Use this method only when a volume flow reference is not available, but a density reference is available.
Procedure
1. Calculate the meter factor for density, using the standard method.
2. Calculate the meter factor for volume flow from the meter factor for density:
MeterFactor
Volume =
1
MeterFactorDensity
The following equation is mathematically equivalent to the first equation. You may use whichever version you prefer.
MeterFactor
Volume =
ConfiguredMeterFactor
Density ×
DensityFlowmeter
DensityReferenceDevice
3. Ensure that the calculated meter factor does not fall outside 0.98 and 1.02. If the meter factor is outside these limits, contact customer service.
4. Configure the meter factor for volume flow in the transmitter.
14.4 Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration
Density calibration establishes the relationship between the density of the calibration fluids and the signal produced at the sensor. Density calibration includes the calibration of the D1 (low-density) and D2 (highdensity) calibration points.
Important
Micro Motion flow meters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field.
Calibrate the flow meter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact customer support before calibrating the flow meter.
Tip
Use meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error.
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
Configuration and Use Manual 151
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low-density) fluid and a D2 (high-density) fluid. You may use air and water.
• The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
• Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
14.4.1 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using the display
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
2. Close the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor.
3. Fill the sensor with the D1 fluid and allow the sensor to achieve thermal equilibrium.
4. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Density Calibration .
5. Perform the D1 calibration.
a) Choose D1 (Air) .
b) Enter the density of your D1 fluid.
c) Choose Start Calibration .
d) Wait for the calibration to complete.
e) Choose Finished .
6. Fill the sensor with the D2 fluid and allow the sensor to achieve thermal equilibrium.
7. Perform the D2 calibration.
a) Choose D2 (Water) .
b) Enter the density of your D2 fluid.
c) Choose Start Calibration .
d) Wait for the calibration to complete.
e) Choose Finished .
8. Open the shutoff valve.
14.4.2 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
152 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
Figure 14-1: D1 and D2 Calibration Work Flow Using ProLink III
D1 Calibration
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
Fill sensor with D1 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density Cal - Point 1
Enter density of D1 fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
D2 Calibration
Fill sensor with D2 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density Cal - Point 2
Enter density of D2 fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Done
14.4.3 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using a web browser
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
2. Close the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor.
3. Fill the sensor with D1 fluid.
4. Choose Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Point 1 (Air) .
5. Enter the correct value for Density of Calibration Fluid .
6. Click Start Calibration .
7. Wait for the calibration process to complete.
8. Fill the sensor with D2 fluid.
9. Choose Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Point 2 (Water) .
10. Enter the correct value for Density of Calibration Fluid .
11. Click Start Calibration .
12. Wait for the calibration process to complete.
Configuration and Use Manual 153
Measurement support
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
14.5 Adjust concentration measurement with Trim
Offset
Trim Offset adjusts the meter's concentration measurement to match a reference value.
Tip
You can adjust concentration measurement by applying the trim offset only, or by applying both the trim offset and the trim slope. For most applications, the trim offset is sufficient.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the active matrix is the one that you want to trim. You can set the offset separately for each matrix on your transmitter.
You must be able to take a sample of your process fluid and obtain a laboratory concentration value at line density and line temperature.
Procedure
1. Take a concentration reading from the meter, and record line density and line temperature.
2. Take a sample of the process fluid and obtain a laboratory value for concentration at line density and line temperature, in the units used by the meter.
3. Subtract the meter value from the laboratory value.
4. Enter the result as the trim offset.
• Using ProLink III: Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Concentration Measurement , set Matrix Being Configured to your matrix, and enter Trim Offset .
5. Take another concentration reading from the meter, and compare it to the laboratory value.
• If the two values are acceptably close, the trim is complete.
• If the two values are not acceptably close, repeat this procedure.
Calculating the trim offset
Laboratory value
Meter value
64.21 °Brix
64.93 °Brix
64.21 − 64.93 = −0.72
Concentration offset: − 0.72
14.6 Adjust concentration measurement with Trim Slope and Trim Offset
Trim Slope and Trim Offset adjust the meter's concentration measurement to match a reference value.
Tip
You can adjust concentration measurement by applying the trim offset only, or by applying both the trim offset and the trim slope. For most applications, the trim offset is sufficient.
154 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Measurement support
November 2022
Prerequisites
Ensure that the active matrix is the one that you want to trim. You can set the offset and slope separately for each matrix on your transmitter.
You must be able to take measurements of your process fluid at two different concentrations.
You must be able to take a sample of your process fluid at each of these concentrations.
For each sample, you must be able to obtain a laboratory concentration value at line density and line temperature.
Procedure
1. Collect data for Comparison 1.
a) Take a concentration reading from the meter and record line density and line temperature.
b) Take a sample of the process fluid at the current concentration.
c) Obtain a laboratory value for concentration at line density and line temperature, in the units used by the meter.
2. Collect data for Comparison 2.
a) Change the concentration of your process fluid.
b) Take a concentration reading from the meter and record line density and line temperature.
c) Take a sample of the process fluid at the current concentration.
d) Obtain a laboratory value for concentration at line density and line temperature, in the units used by the meter.
3. Populate the following equation with values from each comparison.
Concentration
Lab
= A × Concentration
Meter
+ B
4. Solve for A (slope).
5. Solve for B (offset), using the calculated slope and one set of values.
6. Enter the results as the trim slope and the trim offset.
• Using ProLink III: Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Concentration Measurement , set Matrix Being Configured to your matrix, and enter Trim Slope and Trim Offset .
• Using a web browser: Choose Configure
7. Take another concentration reading from the meter, and compare it to the laboratory value.
• If the two values are acceptably close, the trim is complete.
• If the two values are not acceptably close, repeat this procedure.
Calculating the trim slope and the trim offset
Comparison 1
Comparison 2
Laboratory value
Meter value
Laboratory value
Meter value
50.00%
49.98%
16.00%
15.99%
Configuration and Use Manual 155
Measurement support
November 2022
Populate the equations:
Solve for A:
Solve for B:
Concentration slope (A): 1.00029
Concentration offset (B): 0.00551
50 = A × 49.98 + B
16 = A × 15.99 + B
50.00 − 16.00 = 34.00
49.98 − 15.99 = 39.99
34 = A × 33.99
A = 1.00029
50.00 = 1.00029 × 49.98 + B
50.00 = 49.99449 + B
B = 0.00551
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
156 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Maintenance
November 2022
15 Maintenance
15.1 Install a new transmitter license
ProLink III
Web browser
Device Tools → Configuration → Feature License
Service Tools → License Manager
Whenever you purchase additional features or request a trial license, you must install a new transmitter license. The new license makes the new features available on your transmitter. For concentration measurement and API Referral, you may still need to enable the application.
Prerequisites
• You must have a license file provided by Micro Motion:
— perm.lic
: Permanent license file
— temp.lic
: Temporary license file
• A USB-C drive
Procedure
• To install a license using ProLink III: a) Open the license file.
b) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Feature License .
c) Copy the license from the file to the appropriate License Key field.
• To install a license using a web browser: a) Open the license file.
b) Choose Service Tools → License Manager .
c) Copy the license from the file to the appropriate License Key field.
The features supported by the new license are displayed.
If you installed a temporary license, the transmitter will revert to its original feature set when the license period has expired. To purchase a feature for permanent use, contact customer support.
Postrequisites
If you installed a permanent license, update the options model code to match the new license. The options model code represents the installed features.
Configuration and Use Manual 157
Maintenance
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
15.2 Upgrade the transmitter firmware
You can upgrade the transmitter firmware to stay current with development and to take advantage of any new features.
15.2.1 Using the USB-C service port and ProLink III
You can upgrade the transmitter firmware to stay current with development and to take advantage of any new features.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
Prerequisites
You must have the firmware upgrade files provided by Emerson.
Procedure
1. In ProLink III, choose Device Tools → Transmitter Software Update .
2. Navigate to the folder containing the firmware upgrade files.
3. Select Update .
If you chose to reboot the transmitter at a later date, you can reboot it from the display, or you can power-cycle it.
4. Verify the transmitter configuration and all safety parameters.
5. Enable write-protection.
15.3 Reboot the transmitter
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Service Tools → Reboot Transmitter
Not available
Not available
For certain configuration changes to take effect, the transmitter must be rebooted. You must also reboot the transmitter in order to clear certain status alerts.
Rebooting the transmitter has the same effect as power-cycling the transmitter.
Prerequisites
Follow appropriate procedures to select the appropriate time for rebooting the transmitter. The reboot typically takes about 10 seconds.
Postrequisites
Check the transmitter clock. During the reboot, the transmitter clock is powered by the battery, therefore the transmitter clock and all timestamps should be accurate. If the transmitter clock is not correct, the battery may need replacement.
158 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Maintenance
November 2022
15.4 Battery replacement
The transmitter contains a battery that is used to power the clock when the transmitter is not powered up.
Users cannot service or replace the battery. If the battery requires replacement, contact customer support.
If the battery is non-functional and the transmitter is powered down, then powered up, the clock will restart from the time of the power-down. All timestamps will be affected. You can correct the issue by resetting the transmitter clock. For a permanent resolution, the battery must be replaced.
Configuration and Use Manual 159
Maintenance
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
160 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
16 Log files, history files, and service files
16.1 Generate history files
ProLink III
Web browser
Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Download Historical Files
Service Tools → Download Device Files
The transmitter automatically saves historical data of several types, including process and diagnostic variables, Smart Meter Verification test results, and totalizer values. To access the historical data, you can generate a log file, then view it on your PC.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
Prerequisites
If you want to generate a totalizer log, you must have previously configured the transmitter to record totalizer data. However, there is a totalizer history that is logged automatically.
Procedure
1. Select the type of log file that you want to generate.
2. If you selected historian data (process and diagnostic variables): a) Set the date and time for the first entry in the historian log file.
b) Set the number of days that the log file will include.
c) Select the record type.
Option
1 Second Raw Data
5 Min Average Data
Description
The current values of process and diagnostic variables, recorded at 1-second intervals.
The minimum and maximum values of the 1-second raw data over the last
5 minutes, plus the average and the standard deviation, recorded at 5-minute intervals.
The system provides an estimated file size or transfer time.
The log file is written to the specified location. File names are assigned as follows:
• Historian files: The file name is based on the transmitter tag, the starting date of the log contents, and the record type. The record type is shown as F or S:
— F=Fast, for 1-second raw data
— S=Slow, for 5-minute average data
• SMV files:
— SmvLast20Data.csv
Configuration and Use Manual 161
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
— SmvLongTermData.csv
• Totalizer history files: TotLog.txt
16.1.1 Historian data and log
The 1600 transmitter offers a licensable Data Historian option. If enabled, the transmitter automatically saves information about specific process and diagnostic variables. You can generate a log from this data that tracks totalizers and inventories with 21 days worth of data. The historian log is an ASCII file in .csv
format.
Contents of the historian log
There are two types of historian records:
1-second raw data The current values of process and diagnostic variables, recorded at 1-second intervals.
5-minute average data The minimum and maximum values of the 1-second raw data, plus the average and the standard deviation, calculated and recorded at 5-minute intervals.
When you generate the log, you can specify which type of record you want to see.
The historian in the transmitter internal memory contains a minimum of 7 days of 1-second raw data and
30 days of 5-minute average data.
Each record contains data for the following process and diagnostic variables:
• Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
• Mass flow rate (kg/sec)
• Volume flow rate (l/sec) or GSV flow rate
• Density (g/cm ³ )
• Line temperature (°C)
• External temperature (if available)
• Pressure (if available)
• If concentration measurement is enabled:
— Standard volume flow rate
— Net mass flow rate
— Net volume flow rate
— Referred density
— Concentration
• If API Referral is enabled:
— CTPL or CTL
— Corrected density
— Corrected volume flow rate
162 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
• Alert status registers (hexadecimal format)
• Live zero (kg/sec)
• Tube frequency (Hz)
• Drive gain (%)
• Left pickoff (filtered) (V)
• Right pickoff (filtered (V)
• Left pickoff (raw) (V)
• Delta T
• Case temperature (°C)
• Voltage applied to the core processor (V)
• Temperature of the core processor board (°C)
• Temperature of the transmitter electronics (°C)
Historian data and power-cycles
Historian data is maintained across transmitter reboots and power-cycles.
Historian data and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, existing historian data is not affected.
Example: Historian log, 5-minute average data
MassFlow MassFlow MassFlow MassFlow S TAG:SUPPLY UID:22729F1F
SW:000000045 800:000000402
DST ON:Mountain GMT-7.0 SM:T075
SN:000000000
8/25/2020 9:58
8/25/2020 10:03
8/25/2020 10:08
8/25/2020 10:13
8/25/2020 10:18
8/25/2020 10:23
8/25/2020 10:28
8/25/2020 10:33
8/25/2020 10:38
8/25/2020 10:43
8/25/2020 10:48
8/25/2020 10:53
… kg/s Max
0.0082359
0.001018
0.00099489
0.0010835
0.0011767
0.0010243
0.0010903
0.0010319
0.0011232
0.0010841
0.0010999
0.0011523
kg/s Min
0
0.00084441
0.00086279
0.00080879
0.00084206
0.00086888
0.00084823
0.00085327
0.00088614
0.00081306
0.00086106
0.00085537
kg/s Avg
0.00091223
0.00091756
0.00092519
0.00093774
0.00094224
0.00094534
0.00094747
0.00095123
0.00095222
0.00095126
0.00095333
0.00095528
kg/s Std
9.76E-05
1.61E-05
1.44E-05
2.01E-05
2.11E-05
1.85E-05
1.81E-05
1.67E-05
1.59E-05
1.99E-05
1.93E-05
2.01E-05
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Configuration and Use Manual 163
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Note
The historian log displays only in English.
16.1.2 Smart Meter Verification history and log
The transmitter automatically saves test data for all Smart Meter Verification tests. You can generate a log containing data for the 20 most recent tests or for all Smart Meter Verification tests. The log is an ASCII file in .csv
format.
Contents of Smart Meter Verification log
Each record in the Smart Meter Verification log represents a Smart Meter Verification test. Each record contains the following information:
• Date and time of test
• Data collected during the test
• The abort code (15=test completed normally)
• A pass/fail result for the left pickoff (0=Pass, 1=fail)
• A pass/fail result for the right pickoff (0=Pass, 1=fail)
• The sensor type code
• The sensor serial number
Smart Meter Verification history and power-cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, Smart Meter Verification history is not affected.
Smart Meter Verification history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, Smart Meter Verification history is not affected.
Example: Smart Meter Verification log
Device UID: 577937183
Device Tag: SUPPLY
Time Zone: GMT -7.00
Date Time
8/13/2020 19:27
8/14/2020 7:27
8/14/2020 19:27
8/15/2020 7:27
8/18/2020 16:27
8/19/2020 19:27
8/20/2020 16:27
8/21/2020 17:10
8/22/2020 10:40
LPO Stiff
0.285876
-0.06137
0.204754
-0.15382
0.251067
-0.13654
-0.20837
-0.11062
-0.15852
RPO Stiff
0.289738
-0.05808
0.20932
-0.15216
0.251782
-0.14112
-0.20671
-0.11566
-0.16036
LPO Mass
0.155294
0.154748
0.155185
0.154612
0.155217
0.154602
0.154502
0.154641
0.154512
RPO Mass
0.158114
0.157556
0.158004
0.157416
0.158031
0.157396
0.157304
0.157435
0.157308
Damping
4.41E-05
4.02E-05
4.35E-05
3.93E-05
4.34E-05
3.89E-05
3.85E-05
3.84E-05
3.86E-05
Drv mA
1.301
1.304
1.308
1.307
1.308
1.287
1.291
1.288
1.284
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
164 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
8/25/2020 15:40
8/27/2020 23:16
8/28/2020 11:16
…
-0.00172
0.132787
0.04456
0.002301
0.13684
0.046158
0.154788
0.155034
0.154845
0.157599
0.15785
0.157653
4E-05
4.08E-05
3.99E-05
1.295
1.275
1.277
Note
The Smart Meter Verification log displays only in English.
16.1.3 Totalizer log
The totalizer log can track four configurable totals. The period is configurable; you can configure the transmitter to save totalizer and inventory values at a user-specified interval and then generate a totalizer log.
The totalizer log is an ASCII file.
Contents of totalizer log
The totalizer log contains one record for each logged totalizer or inventory value. Each record contains the following information:
• Default totalizer or inventory name (user-specified names are not used)
• Value and measurement unit
• Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
The totalizer log also contains a line item for each totalizer or inventory reset.
Note
• The historian totalizer log is configurable, but defaults to mass and volume totalizers logged at one hour intervals.
• The entire log saves 240 lines before rolling the last lines out, so 5 days of totalizer data are saved by default.
…
…
…
Totalizer logs and power cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, the totalizer log is not affected.
Totalizer logs and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, the totalizer log is not affected.
Example: Totalizer log
================================================================================
Device UID: 22729F1F Device Tag: SUPPLY
Name Value Units Time Zone: GMT-7.00
================================================================================
Mass Fwd Total 61.74707
grams 9/12/2020 20:00
Configuration and Use Manual 165
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Mass Fwd Inv
Mass Fwd Total
Mass Fwd Inv
Mass Fwd Total
Mass Fwd Inv
Mass Fwd Total
Mass Fwd Inv
Mass Fwd Total
Mass Fwd Inv
…
61.74705
61.74707
61.74705
61.74707
61.74705
61.74707
61.74705
61.74707
61.74705
Note
The totalizer history displays only in English.
grams grams grams grams grams grams grams grams grams
9/12/2020 20:00
9/12/2020 21:00
9/12/2020 21:00
9/12/2020 22:00
9/12/2020 22:00
9/12/2020 23:00
9/12/2020 23:00
9/13/2020 0:00
9/13/2020 0:00
Read contract totals
You can read contract totals for the current 24-hour contract period and for the previous 24-hour contract period. Depending on the configuration of the totalizer log, you may be able to read contract totals for earlier periods.
The contract totals are derived from existing inventories. However, they are reset automatically at the beginning of each contract period. Therefore, the values shown will probably not match the values shown for the inventories.
Important
You can reset inventories manually, and you can stop and start inventories manually. However, if you do this, data for the current contract period will not reflect the entire 24-hour period. Data for earlier contract periods is not affected.
• The contract totals for the current contract period are stored in the Today's Total [1-4] parameters.
• The contract totals for the previous contract period are stored in the Yesterday's Total [1-4] parameters.
• The contract totals from earlier contract periods can be read in the totalizer log.
Configure contract totals into the totalizer log
The transmitter can be configured to store contract totals to the totalizer log. This allows you to access totals from earlier contract periods. Otherwise, the transmitter maintains data for only the current contract period
(today) and the immediately preceding contract period (yesterday).
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Totalizer Log .
Option
Display
Description
Menu → Configuration → Totalizer Log
166 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Option
ProLink III
Description
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Log
2. Set Log Total 1 , Log Total 2 , Log Total 3 , and/or Log Total 4 to the desired contract total.
You can configure the totalizer history log to include both Advanced Phase Measurement and standard totals.
16.2 Generate service files
The transmitter automatically saves several types of service data that is useful in troubleshooting, device maintenance, and administration. You can view the data by using ProLink III to generate a service file and then using your PC to open the file.
Prerequisites
If you use the first option from step 1, the service port must be enabled. It is enabled by default. However, if you need to enable it, choose Menu → Configuration → Security and set Service Port to On.
Note
It may take as long as 10 minutes to generate a service file.
Procedure
1.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
Perform one of the following tasks:
Option
Service port
Modbus TCP
Web browser
Description
Use the USB-C cable to connect to the service port.
Using the Modbus TCP connection, connect to ProLink III.
Service Tools → Download Device Files
2. From ProLink III , select Menu → Device Tools → File Transfer → Download Service Files .
3. Click Show Additional Options and select the service file that you want to generate.
Service file
Configuration Audit
Log
Alert History
Historian: 30 Days
Description
All changes to configuration, including changes made by procedures such as zero calibration or density calibration.
All occurrences of alerts and conditions, independent of alert severity.
5-minute average values for selected process and diagnostic variables for the last 30 days.
File name
ConfgAuditLog.txt
AlertLog.txt
Concatenated from transmitter tag and date
Configuration and Use Manual 167
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Service file
Historian: 1 Day
SMV: 20 Runs
Service Snapshot
Factory Config File
Assert Log
Support Contact
Security Log
Description
Values of selected process and diagnostic variables for the last 24 hours, recorded at 1-second intervals.
Test data from the 20 most recent SMV tests.
File name
Concatenated from transmitter tag and date
SmvLast20Data.csv
An ASCII file containing a snapshot of the transmitter internal database. This file is used by customer service.
The configuration file created for this transmitter at the factory.
A troubleshooting file used by customer service.
A PDF file containing information for contacting customer service.
A record of events that might indicate tampering.
service.dump
FactoryConfig.cfg
AssertLog.txt
SupportContact.pdf
SecurityLog.txt
4. Save and specify the folder on the computer where the log file will be saved.
16.2.1 Alert history and log
The transmitter automatically saves information about all alert occurrences to its internal memory. The alert history log is an ASCII file.
Contents of alert history
The alert history in the transmitter internal memory contains the 1000 most recent alert records. Each alert record contains the following information:
• Name of alert or condition
• Category:
— F=Failure
— FC=Function Check
— M=Maintenance Required
— OOS=Out of Specification
— I=Ignore
• Action:
— Active=Transition from inactive to active
— Inactive=Transition from active to inactive
— Toggling=More than 2 transitions in the last 60 seconds
• Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
— Not displayed if Action=Toggling
168 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Alert history and power-cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, the 20 most recent records in alert history are retained in the transmitter internal memory. All earlier records are cleared from internal memory.
Alert history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, alert history is not affected.
16.2.2 Configuration audit history and log
The transmitter automatically saves information about all configuration events to its internal memory. The configuration audit log is an ASCII file.
Contents of configuration audit log
The configuration audit log contains a record for every change to transmitter configuration, including changes resulting from zero calibration, density calibration, etc. Each record contains:
• Modbus location in transmitter memory
— C nnn = Coil
— R nnn = Register
— R nnn xxx = Array, indexed by register xxx
• Name of Modbus location
• Original value
• New value
• Measurement unit, if applicable
• Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
• Host or protocol from which the change was made
Configuration audit history and power-cycles
If the transmitter is power-cycled or rebooted, the event is logged in the configuration audit history. Earlier records are not affected.
Configuration audit history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, the event is logged in the configuration audit history. Earlier records are not affected.
Example: Configuration audit log
====================================================================================
Device UID: 22729F1F
Device Tag: SUPPLY
Addr Name Old Value New Value Unit Time Zone:
GMT-7:00
Host
Configuration and Use Manual 169
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
====================================================================================
C167 SYS_CfgFile_Re 0 1 09/SEP/2019
11:35:11
Display
C167 SYS_CfgFile_Re 0 0 Other
1167 IO_ChannelB_As 10 4
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
Other
351 SNS_API2540Tab 81 100 Other
40
44
14
1180
SNS_DensityUni
SNS_PressureUn
FO_1_Source
MAI_Source
91
6
0
251
92
12
5
55
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
Other
Other
Other
Other
275 MAI_mA20Var 0 250.0
°C Other
4961
68
159
161
163
FO_2_Source
SYS_Tag
SNS_K1
SNS_K2
SNS_DensityTem
0
FT-0000
1606.9
1606.9
5.66
5
SUPPLY
1606.4
7354
4.44
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
09/SEP/2019
11:35:12
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
…
Note
The configuration audit log displays only in English.
16.2.3 Assert history and log
The transmitter automatically saves information about all asserts. You can generate an assert log for use by customer service. The assert log is an ASCII file.
Contents of assert log
The assert history contains the 1000 most recent asserts. An assert is an unusual event in the transmitter firmware that may indicate an error or malfunction. A list of asserts can be useful for troubleshooting by customer service. The assert log is not designed for customer use.
170 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Assert history and power-cycles
Assert history is not affected by reboots or power-cycles.
Assert history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, assert history is not affected.
16.2.4 Security log
The transmitter automatically saves data that helps determine if someone is tampering with the device.
Counters are maintained to track the number of illegal configuration change requests, firmware upgrade failures, and failures to enter the display password. The security log is an ASCII file.
Contents of security log
The security log contains a summary of security events that have occurred since the last transmitter reboot.
The following items are included:
• Device information
• Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
• Number of password entry failures
• Number of transmitter firmware upgrade failures
• Number of database write failures
Security log and power-cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, the security log is not affected.
Configuration and Use Manual 171
Log files, history files, and service files
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Security log and configuration files
If you attempt to restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file when write-protection is enabled, the Database Write Failures counter is increased.
Example: Security log file
TAG:SUPPLY
Device:Config I/O
UID:22729F1F SW:0045
GMT-7.0 DST:DST Zone:(UTC-7:00) Denver
DATE:23/SEP/2019 14:42:58
Addr Name Value
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5851 Password Failures 0
5852
5853
SW Upgrade Failures
Database Write Failures
0
25636
Note
The security log displays only in English.
172 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17 Troubleshooting
17.1 Status LED and device status
The status LED ( MOD STATUS ) on the transmitter display provides a quick indication of device status by changing color and flashing. If the transmitter was ordered without a display, the LEDs on the outputs board inside the transmitter provide the same information.
Table 17-1: Status LED and device status (MMI mode)
Status LED condition
Solid green
Solid yellow
Solid red
Flashing yellow (1 Hz)
Device status
No alerts are active.
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Out of Specification,
Maintenance Required, or Function Check.
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Failure.
The Function Check in Progress alert is active.
Table 17-2: Network status LED and Ethernet network connection status
Network status LED condition
Flashing green
Solid green
Flashing red
Solid red
Network status
No connections made with primary protocol host.
Connection made with primary protocol host.
Connection from primary protocol host has timed out.
Address Conflict Detection (ACD) algorithm has detected a duplicate IP address
(All 1600 transmitter Ethernet communications are stopped.)
17.2 Network status LED
The network status LED ( NET STATUS ) on the transmitter display provides a quick indication of the Ethernet network connection status by changing color and flashing.
Table 17-3: Network status LED and Ethernet network connection status
Network status LED condition
Flashing green
Solid green
Flashing red
Solid red
Network status
No connections made with primary protocol host.
Connection made with primary protocol host.
Connection from primary protocol host has timed out.
Address Conflict Detection (ACD) algorithm has detected a duplicate IP address
(All 1600 transmitter Ethernet communications are stopped.)
Configuration and Use Manual 173
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.3 API Referral troubleshooting
17.3.1 Extrapolation alert is active
Cause
Line pressure, line temperature, or line density is outside the range of the configured API table.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
17.3.2 Inaccurate referred density reading
Cause
• Inaccurate density measurement
• Inaccurate temperature measurement
• Incorrect reference conditions
• Incorrect API table selection
Recommended actions
1. Verify the line density value.
2. Verify the line temperature value.
3. Ensure that the application is configured to use the appropriate temperature source.
4. Ensure that the pressure source is configured correctly, that the external pressure device is operating correctly, and that both devices are using the same measurement units.
5. Ensure that reference temperature and reference pressure, if applicable, are configured correctly.
6. Ensure that the selected API table is appropriate for the process fluid.
17.4 Batch troubleshooting
17.4.1 Batch will not start
Cause
• Previous batch not ended
• Valve is closed but the transmitter is detecting flow
• No discrete output configured for batch control
Recommended actions
1. End the batch.
2. Check for two-phase flow.
3. Verify the zero.
174 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
4. Verify the cutoffs.
5. Set up a channel to operate as a discrete output, and configure it for batch control.
17.4.2 Valve operation is backwards
Cause
• Discrete Output wiring is incorrect
• Discrete Output polarity is reversed
Recommended actions
1. Verify the wiring between the Discrete Output and the valve. The ON signal must open the valve.
Perform a loop test.
2. Change the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
17.4.3 Valve does not operate
Cause
• Discrete Output wiring is incorrect
• Discrete Output channel is set up for internal power
Recommended actions
1. Verify the wiring between the Discrete Output and the valve. The ON signal must open the valve.
Perform a loop test.
2. Ensure that the channel is wired and configured for external power.
3. Ensure that the valve and channel are powered.
17.4.4 Batch totals are inaccurate
Cause
• Batch target is incorrect
• AOC is inaccurate
• Flow measurement needs adjustment
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the correct batch preset is active.
2. Verify that the batch target is set correctly.
3. If you have recently changed the batch target, run a few batches and wait for the AOC value to adjust.
4. Repeat AOC calibration.
5. Adjust the fixed AOC value.
6. Compare the batch total to a scale reading.
Configuration and Use Manual 175
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.4.5 Batch repeat not satisfactory
Cause
• AOC is inaccurate
• Inconsistent or leaking valve
• Process is unstable
Recommended actions
1. Inspect the valve and replace if necessary.
2. Repeat AOC calibration.
3. Ensure that line pressure is stable.
4. Ensure that bowl level is approximately constant.
5. Ensure that the pump is not causing unstable flow.
17.5 Concentration measurement troubleshooting
17.5.1 Significantly incorrect CM after loading matrix
Cause
The wrong temperature or density unit was configured when the matrix was loaded.
Recommended actions
Set the temperature and density units to the units used when the matrix was built, then reload the matrix.
For custom matrices, contact customer support.
17.5.2 Inaccurate CM reading
Cause
• Inaccurate density measurement
• Inaccurate temperature measurement
• Incorrect reference conditions
• Incorrect matrix data
• Inappropriate trim values
Recommended actions
1. Verify the line density value.
2. Verify the line temperature value.
3. Ensure that the application is configured to use the appropriate temperature source.
4. Ensure that reference temperature is configured correctly.
5. Ensure that the appropriate matrix is active.
176 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
6. Ensure that the matrix is configured correctly.
7. Adjust the extrapolation limits for the active matrix.
8. Adjust measurement with a concentration offset trim.
17.6 Alert when connecting a core processor to a remote
1600 transmitter
When connecting a core processor to a 1600, you will see the following alert from the transmitter display.
Alert
New Core Detected
Cause
A new core processor was detected.
Recommended actions
1. Select one of the following options when prompted by the screen.
Option
Core Only Replacement
Description
The new core processor is replacing an old core processor and the sensor is not getting replaced.
The core processor is brand new without a baseline and has default factory values, such as K1 = 1000 and K2 = 5000.
Action
Restore configuration and verify sensor parameters.
Pre-Calibrated Core Replacement The new core processor is precalibrated and matched with the sensor.
You are replacing a core processor that has already been paired with a sensor that has already been characterized.
Not Pre-Calibrated Core
Replacement
Verify the sensor parameters and save the configuration.
Enter the sensor parameters and save the configuration.
The core processor and sensor are being replaced, but the core processor has not been precalibrated or matched with the sensor.
The sensor and core processor are being replaced but the new core processor has not been paired
(characterized) with the new sensor.
I Don't Know You do not know if the new core processor has been pre-calibrated and matched with the sensor.
Verify the sensor parameters and save the configuration if there was a change.
Configuration and Use Manual 177
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2. Select Continue .
3. Per the screen message, contact Emerson if you have any questions before you select the Finished button.
These screens will not display again until another new core processor has been detected.
17.7 Density measurement troubleshooting
17.7.1 Erratic density reading
Cause
• Normal process noise
• Two-phase flow
• Line pressure too low
• The flow rate is too high for the installation
• Pipe diameter too small
• Contaminants or suspended solids in the process gas
• Contaminants or suspended solids in the process fluid
• Vibration in the pipeline
• Erosion or corrosion
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Increase the density damping value.
3. Decrease the flow rate.
4. Check for two-phase flow.
5. Ensure that line pressure or sample pressure meets installation requirements.
6. Increase back pressure to minimize bubble formation.
7. Minimize vibration in the pipeline.
8. Increase the pipe diameter.
9. Install a flow control method (bypass, flow chamber, expander, etc.).
10. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
17.7.2 Inaccurate density reading
Cause
• Problem with process fluid
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Wiring problem
• Incorrect grounding
178 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
• Two-phase flow
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Incorrect sensor orientation
• RTD failure
• Physical characteristics of sensor have changed
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Check the grounding of all components.
3. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
4. Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
5. Check for two-phase flow.
6. If two sensors with similar frequency are too near each other, separate them.
7. Purge the sensor tubes.
8. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
17.7.3 Unusually high density reading
Cause
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Inaccurate temperature measurement
• RTD failure
• In high-frequency meters, erosion, or corrosion
• In low-frequency meters, tube fouling
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
2. Purge the sensor tubes.
3. Check for coating in the flow tubes.
4. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
17.7.4 Unusually low density reading
Cause
• Two-phase flow
• Incorrect calibration factors
• In low-frequency meters, erosion or corrosion
Configuration and Use Manual 179
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
3. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
4. Check for tube erosion, especially if the process fluid is abrasive.
5. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
17.8 Discrete Output troubleshooting
17.8.1 No Discrete Output
Cause
• Output not powered
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
2. Verify the output wiring.
3. Verify that the channel is wired and configured as a Discrete Output.
4. Contact customer service.
17.8.2 Loop test failed
Cause
• Output not powered
• Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
2. Verify the output wiring.
3. Contact customer service.
17.8.3 Discrete Output readings reversed
Cause
• Wiring problem
• Configuration does not match wiring
180 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Recommended actions
1. Verify the output wiring.
2. Ensure that Discrete Output Polarity is set correctly.
17.9 Flow measurement troubleshooting
17.9.1 Flow rate reported as zero when flow is present
Cause
The process condition is below cutoff.
Recommended action
Verify the cutoffs.
17.9.2 Flow indication at no flow conditions or zero offset
Cause
• Misaligned piping (especially in new installations)
• Open or leaking valve
• Incorrect sensor zero
Recommended actions
1. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
2. If the reading is not excessively high, review the live zero. You may need to restore the factory zero.
3. Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
4. Check for mounting stress on the sensor (e.g., sensor being used to support piping, misaligned piping).
5. Contact customer service.
17.9.3 Erratic non-zero flow rate at no-flow conditions
Cause
• Leaking valve or seal
• Two-phase flow
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Incorrect sensor orientation
• Wiring problem
• Vibration in pipeline at rate close to sensor tube frequency
• Damping value too low
Configuration and Use Manual 181
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• Mounting stress on sensor
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application.
See the installation manual for your sensor.
2. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
3. If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes a 9-wire segment, verify that the 9wire cable shields are correctly grounded.
4. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
5. For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
6. Purge the sensor tubes.
7. Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
8. Check for sources of vibration.
9. Verify damping configuration.
10. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
11. Check for two-phase flow.
12. Check for radio frequency interference.
13. Contact customer service.
17.9.4 Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow is steady
Cause
• Two-phase flow
• Damping value too low
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Wiring problem
• Problem with receiving device
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application.
See the installation manual for your sensor.
2. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
3. If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes a 9-wire segment, verify that the 9wire cable shields are correctly grounded.
4. Check for air entrainment, tube fouling, flashing, or tube damage.
5. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
6. For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
7. Purge the sensor tubes.
8. Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
9. Check for sources of vibration.
10. Verify damping configuration.
182 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
11. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
12. Check for two-phase flow.
13. Check for radio frequency interference.
14. Contact customer service.
17.9.5 Inaccurate flow rate
Cause
• Wiring problem
• Inappropriate measurement unit
• Incorrect flow calibration factor
• Incorrect meter factor
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Incorrect grounding
• Two-phase flow
• Problem with receiving device
• Incorrect sensor zero
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
3. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
4. Zero the meter.
5. Check the grounding of all components.
6. Check for two-phase flow.
7. Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
8. Check the sensor coils for electrical shorts. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
9. Replace the core processor or transmitter.
17.10 Frequency Output troubleshooting
17.10.1 No FO
Cause
• Stopped totalizer
• Process condition below cutoff
• Fault condition if Fault Action is set to Internal Zero or Downscale
• Two-phase flow
Configuration and Use Manual 183
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
• Flow in reverse direction from configured flow direction parameter
• Frequency Output Direction not set correctly
• Bad frequency receiving device
• Output level not compatible with receiving device
• Bad output circuit
• Output not powered
• Wiring problem
• Channel not configured for desired output
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the process conditions are below the low-flow cutoff. Reconfigure the low-flow cutoff if necessary.
2. Check the Fault Action settings.
3. Verify that the totalizers are not stopped. A stopped totalizer will cause the Frequency Output to be locked.
4. Check for two-phase flow.
5. Check flow direction.
6. Check the direction parameters.
7. Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
8. Verify that the channel is wired and configured as a Frequency Output.
9. Perform a loop test.
17.10.2 Consistently incorrect FO measurement
Cause
• Output not scaled correctly
• Incorrect measurement unit configured for process variable
Recommended actions
1. Check the scaling of the Frequency Output.
2. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
17.10.3 Erratic FO
Cause
There is Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) from the environment.
Recommended action
Check for radio frequency interference.
184 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17.10.4 FO goes in and out of fault conditions
Cause
There is a problem with the interaction between the Output Saturated alert and the fault action configured for the output.
Recommended actions
1. Change the severity of the Output Saturated alert from Fault to another option.
2. Configure the transmitter to ignore the Output Saturated alert or the relevant conditions.
3. Change the configuration of Fault Action from Downscale to another option.
17.11 mA Output troubleshooting
17.11.1 No mAO
Cause
• Output not powered
• Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. If applicable, check the output wiring to verify that the output is powered.
2. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
3. Verify the output wiring.
4. Check the Fault Action settings.
5. Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
6. Measure DC voltage across output terminals to verify that the output is active.
7. Contact customer service.
17.11.2 Loop test failed
Cause
• Output not powered
• Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
2. Verify the output wiring.
Configuration and Use Manual 185
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
3. Check the Fault Action settings.
4. Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
5. Contact customer service.
17.11.3 mAO below 4 mA
Cause
• Output not powered
• Open in wiring
• Bad output circuit
• Process condition below LRV
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
• Fault condition if Fault Action is set to Internal Zero or Downscale
• Bad mA receiving device
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
3. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
4. Check the Fault Action settings.
5. Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
17.11.4 Constant mAO
Cause
• Incorrect process variable assigned to the output
• Fault condition exists
• A loop test is in progress
• Zero calibration failure
• mA Output Direction not set correctly
Recommended actions
1. Verify the output variable assignments.
2. View and resolve any existing alert conditions.
3. Check the direction parameters.
4. Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
5. If related to a zero calibration failure, reboot or power-cycle the transmitter and retry the zeroing procedure.
186 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17.11.5 mAO consistently out of range
Cause
• Incorrect process variable or units assigned to output
• Fault condition if Fault Action is set to Upscale or Downscale
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
Recommended actions
1. Verify the output variable assignments.
2. Verify the measurement units configured for the output.
3. Check the Fault Action settings.
4. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
5. Check the mA Output trim.
17.11.6 Consistently incorrect mA measurement
Cause
• Loop problem
• Output not trimmed correctly
• Incorrect measurement unit configured for process variable
• Incorrect process variable configured
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
• mA Output Direction not set correctly
Recommended actions
1. Check the mA Output trim.
2. Verify the measurement units configured for the output.
3. Verify the process variable assigned to the mA Output.
4. Check the direction parameters.
5. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
17.11.7 mAO correct at lower current, but incorrect at higher current
Cause
The mA loop resistance may be set too high.
Recommended actions
Verify that the mA Output load resistance is below the maximum supported load.
See the installation manual for your transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 187
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.11.8 mAO goes in and out of fault conditions
Cause
There is a problem with the interaction between the Output Saturated alert and the fault action configured for the output.
Recommended actions
1. Change the severity of the Output Saturated alert from Fault to another option.
2. Configure the transmitter to ignore the Output Saturated alert or the relevant conditions.
3. Change the configuration of Fault Action from Downscale to another option.
17.12 Status alerts, causes, and recommendations
Not all of these alerts may apply to your type of transmitter.
17.12.1 [002] RAM Error (Core Processor)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is an internal memory problem with the core processor. This alert will not clear until you reboot or power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
7. Replace the core processor.
17.12.2 [003] Sensor Failed
Alert
Sensor Failed
188 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Cause
Recommended actions
1. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
.
4. Check the integrity of the sensor tubes.
5. Ensure that the sensor is completely full or completely empty.
6. Replace the sensor.
7. Contact customer service.
17.12.3 [005] Mass Flow Rate Overrange
Alert
Extreme Primary Purpose Variable
Cause
The measured flow is outside the sensor's flow limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify that the transmitter is configured correctly for the connected sensor.
3. Check for two-phase flow.
Refer to Check for two-phase flow (slug flow) .
4. Contact customer service.
17.12.4 [008] Density Overrange
Alert
Cause
Recommended actions
1. If other alerts are present, resolve those alert conditions first.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Check for two-phase flow by checking for two-phase alerts. If two-phase flow is the problem, alerts will be posted.
4. Contact customer service.
Configuration and Use Manual 189
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.12.5 [009] Transmitter Initializing
Alert
Cause
The transmitter is in power-up mode.
Recommended actions
Allow the meter to complete its power-up sequence. The alert should clear automatically.
17.12.6 [010] Calibration Failed
Alert
Cause
The calibration failed.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that your calibration procedure meets the documented requirements.
2. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
3. Retry the procedure.
17.12.7 [016] Sensor Temperature (RTD) Failure
Alert
Sensor Failed
Cause
The value computed for the resistance of the line RTD is outside limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a) Refer to the installation manual and ensure that the wiring has been performed according to instructions. Obey all applicable safety messages.
b) Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c) Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to case. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
d) Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Check the feedthrough pins. Contact customer service for assistance. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
4. Check the junction box for moisture, corrosion, or verdigris.
5. Contact customer service.
190 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17.12.8 [017] Sensor Case Temperature (RTD) Failure
Alert
Sensor Failed
Cause
The values computed for the resistance of the meter and case RTDs are outside limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a) Refer to the installation manual and ensure that the wiring has been performed according to instructions. Obey all applicable safety messages.
b) Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c) Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to case. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
d) Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Contact customer service.
17.12.9 [018] EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is an internal memory problem with the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
Important
This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
7. If the alert persists, replace the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 191
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.12.10 [019] RAM Error (Transmitter)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is a ROM checksum mismatch in the transmitter or the RAM address location cannot be written in the transmitter. This alert will not clear until you reboot or power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
7. If the alert persists, replace the transmitter.
17.12.11 [020] Calibration Factors Missing
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
Some calibration factors have not been entered or are incorrect.
Recommended actions
1. Verify characterization parameters (specifically Flow Cal Factor and K1 values). Refer to
Characterize the meter (if required) .
2. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
3. If Sensor Type = Curved Tube, ensure that no parameters specific to Straight Tube have been set.
4. Check the feedthrough pins. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
Contact customer service for assistance.
5. Check the core processor housing for moisture, corrosion, or verdigris.
6. Check the junction box for moisture, corrosion, or verdigris.
7. Check the sensor coils for electrical shorts. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
192 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17.12.12 [021] Incorrect Sensor Type
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
Transmitter verification of sensor circuits and characterization has produced a discrepancy. The transmitter cannot operate the sensor.
Recommended actions
1. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
2. Verify characterization parameters (specifically Flow Cal Factor and K1 values). Refer to
Characterize the meter (if required) .
3. Contact customer service.
17.12.13 [022] Configuration Database Corrupt
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is a NVM checksum mismatch in the core processor's configuration memory. This alert applies to the standard core processor only.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
7. If the alert persists, replace the core processor.
17.12.14 [024] Program Corrupt (Core Processor)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is a checksum mismatch in the core processor's program section.
Configuration and Use Manual 193
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
7. If the alert persists, replace the core processor.
17.12.15 [026] Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
Alert
Cause
The transmitter has lost communication with the core processor, or there have been too many communications errors.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Verify the power to both the transmitter and core processor.
3. Cycle power to the transmitter.
4. If the problem persists, contact customer support.
17.12.16 [027] Security Breach
Alert
Security Breach
Cause
The transmitter is not secured.
Recommended actions
Secure the transmitter.
17.12.17 [028] Core Process Write Failure
Alert
Cause
A write to the core processor failed.
194 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
2. Contact customer service about servicing or replacing the core processor or transmitter.
17.12.18 [030] Incorrect Board Type
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The firmware or configuration loaded in the transmitter is incompatible with the board type.
Recommended actions
1. If this alarm occurred in conjunction with an effort to load a configuration into the transmitter, confirm that the transmitter is of the same model as the one the configuration came from.
2. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
3. If the problem persists, contact customer service.
17.12.19 [031] Low Power
Alert
Core Low Power
Cause
The enhanced core processor is not receiving sufficient power. This alert will not clear until you reboot or power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Measure the voltage at the core processor terminals and ensure that it is receiving a minimum of
11.5 volts at all times. If it is not, verify the power wiring to the transmitter.
3. Verify that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power.
a) If it is not, correct the problem and reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
b) If it is, this suggests that the transmitter has an internal power issue. Replace the transmitter.
17.12.20 [033] Insufficient Pickoff Signal
Alert
Tube Not Full
Cause
The signal from the sensor pickoffs is insufficient for operation (enhanced core processor only).
Configuration and Use Manual 195
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Recommended actions
1. Check for two-phase flow.
2. Check the sensor tubes for plugging or coating.
3. Check for fluid separation by monitoring the density value and comparing the results against expected density values.
4. Ensure that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application. Settling from a two-phase or three-phase fluid can cause this alert even if the flow tubes are full.
17.12.21 [034] Smart Meter Verification Failed
Alert
Function Check Failed or Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Cause
The current Smart Meter Verification value is statistically different than the factory baseline value.
Recommended actions
Minimize process instability and repeat the test.
17.12.22 [035] Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Alert
Function Check Failed or Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Cause
The Smart Meter Verification test did not complete, possibly because it was manually aborted or because process conditions were too unstable.
Recommended actions
1. Minimize process instability and repeat the test.
2. Check the Smart Meter Verification abort code and take appropriate steps.
3. Contact customer service.
Table 17-4: SMV aborts code
6
7
4
5
8
2
3
Abort code
1
Abort reason
Manual abort by end user
SMV timeout
Pickoff Voltage low
Abort recommendation
Not available
Check status of pickoff and drive coils.
Check status of pickoff and drive coils.
Temperature unstable
Cal state in progress
Ensure temperature is stable. Start again.
Not available
Unused Not available
Drive loop AGC reported an amplitude error Check status of pickoff and drive coils.
High flow (dt) standard deviation Reduce flow rate and start again.
196 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Table 17-4: SMV aborts code (continued)
12
13
14
Abort code
9
10
11
15
Abort reason
High flow (dt) mean value
State in progress
Verification complete
Transmitter in fault
No factory air verification
No factory water verification
Drive frequency drift from carrier frequency
Abort recommendation
Reduce flow rate and start again.
Not available
Not available
Clear alarms before proceeding.
Perform factory calibration on air.
Perform factory calibration on water.
Ensure temperature, flow, and density are stable. Start again.
17.12.23 [102] Drive Overrange
Alert
Drive Over-Range
Cause
The drive power (current/ voltage) is at its maximum.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
3. Verify that the tubes are full of process fluid.
4. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
Refer to Check the pickoff voltage
.
5. Check the sensor coils for electrical shorts. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
Refer to Check for internal electrical problems .
6. Ensure that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application.
Settling from a two-phase or three-phase fluid can cause this alert even if the flow tubes are full.
17.12.24 [103] Configuration Warning
Alert
Configuration Warning
Cause
The core processor was unable to store the totalizer and inventory values on the last power-down, and must rely on the saved totals. (Standard core processor only)
Configuration and Use Manual 197
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Recommended actions
Verify that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power.
• If it is not, correct the problem and reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
• If it is, replace the transmitter because the transmitter has an internal power issue.
17.12.25 [104] Calibration in Progress
Alert
Function Check in Progress
Cause
A calibration is running.
Recommended actions
Allow the test to complete.
17.12.26 [105] Two-Phase Flow
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
Recommended actions
Check for two-phase flow.
Refer to
Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) for an mA Output
.
17.12.27 [110] Frequency Output 1 Saturated
Alert
Output Saturated
Cause
The calculated output value is outside the range of the output.
Recommended actions
1. Check the scaling of the Frequency Output.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Ensure that both devices are using the same measurement unit.
4. Purge the sensor tubes.
17.12.28 [111] Frequency Output 1 Fixed
Alert
Output Fixed
198 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Cause
The output is configured to send a constant value. A loop test may be in progress.
Recommended actions
Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
17.12.29 [116] Temperature Overrange (API Referral)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line temperature is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that process temperature is within the range of the API table.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
17.12.30 [117] Density Overrange (API Referral)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line density is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that process density is within the range of the API table.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
17.12.31 [119] Discrete Output 2 Fixed
Alert
Output Fixed
Cause
The output is set to a constant state. A loop test may be in progress.
Recommended actions
Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
17.12.32 [120] Curve Fit Failure (Concentration)
Alert
Configuration Error
Configuration and Use Manual
Troubleshooting
November 2022
199
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Cause
Recommended actions
1. Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
2. Contact customer service.
17.12.33 [121] Extrapolation Alert (Concentration)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line density or line temperature is outside the range of the concentration matrix plus the configured extrapolation limit.
Recommended actions
Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
17.12.34 [123] Pressure Overrange (API Referral)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line pressure is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that process pressure is within the range of the API table.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
17.12.35 [131] Smart Meter Verification in Progress
Alert
Function Check in Progress
Cause
A Smart Meter Verification test is running.
Recommended actions
Allow the test to complete.
17.12.36 [132] Sensor Simulation Active
Alert
Sensor Being Simulated
200 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Cause
Sensor simulation mode is enabled (enhanced core processor only).
Recommended actions
Disable sensor simulation.
17.12.37 [138] TBR Active
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
Drive gain is above the configured threshold and transient bubble remediation is active.
Recommended actions
Check for air entrainment, tube fouling, flashing, or tube damage.
17.12.38 Bad IP network settings
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
• IF DHCP is enabled, the DHCP server could not be found.
• If DHCP is disabled, there is a mismatch between the IP address, Subnet mask and default gateway settings.
Recommended actions
1. Correct the network settings on the transmitter and/or the PC.
2. If the transmitter is installed on an Ethernet network, contact your network administrator to determine the correct network settings.
17.12.39 Batcher Not Configured
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
One or more of the following has occurred:
• The batcher application is disabled
• No flow source has been configured for the batcher application
• The batch target is 0
• No Discrete Output is assigned to batch control
Configuration and Use Manual 201
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Recommended actions
Verify the configuration of the batcher application and related parameters.
17.12.40 Batch Time Out
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The batch exceeded Maximum Batch Time , and ended before the target was reached.
Recommended actions
Verify the configuration of the batcher application and related parameters.
17.12.41 Clock Failure
Alert
Data Loss Possible
Cause
The transmitter real-time clock is not incrementing.
Recommended actions
Contact customer service.
17.12.42 Core Processor Update Failed
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The core processor software update failed.
Recommended actions
1. Resolve any active alerts.
2. Check the connection between the transmitter and the core processor.
3. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter, then retry the procedure.
4. Contact customer service.
17.12.43 mA Output Fixed
Alert
Output Fixed
202 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Cause
The output is configured to send a constant value. A loop test may be in progress.
Recommended actions
1. Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
2. Exit mA Output trim, if applicable.
17.12.44 mA Output Saturated
Alert
Output Saturated
Cause
The calculated output value is outside the range of the output.
Recommended actions
1. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
Refer to Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) for an mA Output .
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Ensure that both devices are using the same measurement unit.
4. Purge the sensor tubes.
17.12.45 Enhanced Event
X
Active
Alert
Event Active
Cause
The conditions assigned to any enhanced event (Enhanced Event 1 through Enhanced Event 5) are present.
Recommended actions
1. If this is an accurate indication of process conditions, no action is required. The alert will clear when the process returns to normal.
2. Review event configuration if you believe the event was triggered erroneously.
17.12.46 Event
X
Active
Alert
Event Active
Cause
The conditions assigned to either Basic Event 1 or Basic Event 2 are present.
Configuration and Use Manual 203
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Recommended actions
1. If this is an accurate indication of process conditions, no action is required. The alert will clear when the process returns to normal.
2. Review event configuration if you believe the event was triggered erroneously.
17.12.47 Moderate Two Phase Flow
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The transmitter has detected moderate two-phase flow.
Recommended actions
Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
17.12.48 No Permanent License
Alert
Data Loss Possible
Cause
A permanent license has not been installed in the transmitter firmware.
Recommended actions
1. If you have a permanent license, install it.
2. If you do not have a permanent license, contact customer service.
17.12.49 Paper Out
Cause
A functional check alert is commonly triggered due to the following conditions:
• Incorrect network settings configuration
• Out of paper
• Paper tray is open
• Printer already has six open connections
• Another transmitter tries to start a print while another transmitter is printing
Recommended actions
Check the trigger conditions and correct as needed.
Important
Configuration items and audit log tickets can take more than 15 minutes to print and use up large amounts of paper.
204 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
If during this time another transmitter starts a print, the new print may either be rejected, causing a functional check alert (printer offline), or the print will be inserted in the middle of the configuration/ audit log print.
The functional check alert is cleared after a successful print.
17.12.50 Password Not Set
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
Display security has been enabled but the display password has not been changed from the default value.
Recommended actions
Configure a password or disable display security.
17.12.51 Severe Two Phase Flow
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The transmitter has detected severe two-phase flow.
Recommended actions
Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
17.12.52
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The system time has not been entered. The system time is required for diagnostic logs.
Recommended actions
Set the system time.
17.12.53 Transmitter Software Update Failed
Cause
The transmitter software update failed.
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 205
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2. Retry the procedure.
3. Contact customer service.
17.12.54 Watchdog Error
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
The watchdog timer has expired.
Recommended actions
Contact customer support.
17.13 Check the cutoffs
If the transmitter cutoffs are configured incorrectly, the transmitter may report zero flow when flow is present, or very small amounts of flow under no-flow conditions.
Procedure
Verify the configuration of all cutoffs.
17.14 Check the direction parameters
If the direction parameters are set incorrectly, flow rate may be reported as reverse when it is actually forward, or vice versa. Totalizers and inventories may increment when they should decrement, or vice versa.
The reported flow rate and flow totals depend on the interaction of four factors: the flow direction arrow on the sensor, actual flow direction, the Sensor Flow Direction Arrow parameter, the Direction parameter for the mA output or the frequency output, and the Totalizer Direction parameter.
Procedure
1. Ensure that Sensor Flow Direction Arrow is set correctly for your sensor installation and your process.
2. Verify the configuration of mA Output Direction , Frequency Output Direction , and Totalizer
Direction .
17.15 Check the drive gain
Excessive or erratic drive gain may indicate any of a variety of process conditions or sensor problems.
To know whether your drive gain is excessive or erratic, you must collect drive gain data during the problem condition and compare it to drive gain data from a period of normal operation.
206 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Excessive (saturated) drive gain
Table 17-5: Possible causes and recommended actions for excessive (saturated) drive gain
Possible cause
Bent sensor tube
Cracked sensor tube
Flow rate out of range
Open drive or pickoff sensor coil
Over-pressurized tubes
Plugged sensor tube
Sensor case full of process fluid
Sensor imbalance
Sensor tubes not completely full
Two-phase flow
Vibrating element not free to vibrate
Recommended actions
Check the pickoff voltages (see Check the pickoff voltage
). If either of them are close to zero (but neither is zero), the sensor tubes may be bent. The sensor will need to be replaced.
Replace the sensor.
Ensure that the flow rate is within sensor limits.
Contact customer support.
Contact customer support.
A dull, audible hum, and unusually high sensor vibration is usually accompanied by high,
even saturated, drive gain. Check the pickoff voltages (see Check the pickoff voltage ). If
either of them are close to zero (but neither is zero), plugged tubes may be the source of your problem. Purge the tubes. In extreme cases, you may need to replace the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact customer support.
Correct process conditions so that the sensor tubes are full.
Check for two-phase flow. See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)
.
Ensure that the vibrating element is free to vibrate.
Erratic drive gain
Table 17-6: Possible causes and recommended actions for erratic drive gain
Possible cause
Foreign material caught in sensor tubes
Recommended actions
• Purge the sensor tubes.
• Replace the sensor.
17.16 Check for internal electrical problems
Shorts between sensor terminals or between the sensor terminals and the sensor case can cause the sensor to stop working.
Possible cause
Moisture inside the sensor junction box
Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case
Internally shorted feedthrough
Faulty cable
Recommended action
Ensure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is present.
Contact customer support.
Contact customer support.
Replace the cable.
Configuration and Use Manual 207
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Possible cause
Improper wire termination
Shorts to the housing created by trapped or damaged wires
Loose wires or connectors
Liquid or moisture inside the housing
Recommended action
Verify wire terminations inside the sensor junction box. See
Micro Motion 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Preparation and
Installation Manual Micro Motion 9-Wire Flow Meter Cable
Preparation and Installation Guide .
Contact customer support.
Contact customer support.
Contact customer support.
17.17 Check Frequency Output Fault Action
The Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Frequency Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition. If the Frequency Output is reporting a constant value, the transmitter may be in a fault condition.
Procedure
1. Check the status alerts for active fault conditions.
2. If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its behavior, change the setting of Frequency Output Fault Action .
3. If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
17.18 Check the scaling of the Frequency Output
If the process variable assigned to the Frequency Output goes to a value that would set the Frequency Output to a signal below 0 Hz or above 12500 Hz, the meter will post an Output Saturated alert for the affected output, then perform the configured fault action.
Procedure
1. Record your current process conditions.
2. Adjust the scaling of the Frequency Output.
17.19 Check grounding
A sensor and the transmitter must be grounded.
Prerequisites
You will need an:
• Installation manual for your sensor
• Installation manual for your transmitter (remote-mount installations only)
Procedure
Refer to the sensor and transmitter installation manuals for grounding requirements and instructions.
208 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17.20 Perform loop tests
A loop test is a way to verify that the transmitter and the remote device are communicating properly. A loop test also helps you know whether you need to trim mA Outputs.
Prerequisites
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
17.20.1 Perform a mA loop test using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing an mA loop test, configure Channel B as an mA Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Output Simulation and select the mA Output.
2. Set Simulation Value to 4 .
3. Start the simulation.
4. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
5. Choose New Value .
6. Set Simulation Value to 20 .
7. Start the simulation.
8. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
9. Choose Exit .
Postrequisites
• If the mA Output readings are within 200 microamps of each other, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 200 microamps, or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
17.20.2 Perform a Frequency Output loop test using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing a Frequency Output loop test, configure Channel B as a Frequency Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Configuration and Use Manual 209
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Output Simulation and select the Frequency Output.
2. Set Simulation Value to 1 .
3. Start the simulation.
4. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
5. Choose New Value .
6. Set Simulation Value to 14500 .
7. Start the simulation.
8. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
9. Choose Exit .
17.20.3 Perform a Discrete Output loop test using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing a Discrete Output loop test, configure Channel B as a Discrete Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Output Simulator and select the Discrete Output.
2. Set Simulation Value to ON.
3. Start the simulation.
4. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
5. Choose New Value .
6. Set Simulation Value to OFF.
7. Start the simulation.
8. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
9. Choose Exit .
Postrequisites
If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
17.20.4 Perform an mA loop test using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing an mA loop test, configure Channel B as an mA Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing and select the mA Output to test.
210 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
2. Enter 4 in Fix to: .
3. Select Fix mA .
4. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
5. Select UnFix mA .
6. Enter 20 in Fix to: .
7. Select Fix mA .
8. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
9. Select UnFix mA .
Postrequisites
• If the mA Output readings are within 200 microamps of each other, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 200 microamps, or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
17.20.5 Perform a Frequency Output loop test using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing a Frequency Output loop test, configure Channel B as a Frequency Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing and select the Frequency Output to test.
2. Enter the Frequency Output value in Fix to .
3. Select Fix FO .
4. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
5. Select UnFix FO .
17.20.6 Perform a Discrete Output loop tests using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing a Discrete Output loop test, configure Channel B as a Discrete Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Discrete Output Test .
Configuration and Use Manual 211
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
2. If your transmitter is configured for two or more Discrete Outputs, determine which Discrete Output you want to test.
3. Set Fix To: to ON.
4. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
5. Set Fix To: to OFF.
6. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
7. Select UnFix .
Postrequisites
If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
17.20.7 Perform an mA loop test using a web browser
Prerequisites
Before performing an mA loop test, configure Channel B as an mA Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Simulation → mA Output Test .
2. Enter 4 in Fix to: .
3. Select Fix mA .
4. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
5. Select UnFix mA .
6. Enter 20 in Fix to: .
7. Select Fix mA .
8. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
9. Select UnFix mA .
Postrequisites
• If the mA Output readings are within 200 microamps of each other, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 200 microamps, or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
17.20.8 Perform a Frequency Output loop test using a web browser
Prerequisites
Before performing a Frequency Output loop test, configure Channel B as a Frequency Output.
212 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Service Tools → Simulation → Frequency Output Test .
2. Enter the Frequency Output value in Fix to .
3. Select Fix FO .
4. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
5. Select UnFix FO .
17.20.9 Perform a Discrete Output loop test using a web browser
Prerequisites
Before performing a Discrete Output loop test, configure Channel B as a Discrete Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Service Tools → Simulation → Discrete Output Test .
2. Set Fix To: to ON.
3. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
4. Set Fix To: to OFF.
5. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
6. Select UnFix .
Postrequisites
If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
17.21 Check Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value
If the process variable assigned to the mA Output falls below the configured Lower Range Value (LRV) or rises above the configured Upper Range Value (URV), the meter will post an Output Saturated alert for the affected output, then perform the configured fault action.
Procedure
1. Record your current process conditions.
2. Check the configuration of the LRV and URV.
Configuration and Use Manual 213
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.22 Check mA Output Fault Action
The mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition. If the mA Output is reporting a constant value below 4 mA or above 20 mA, the transmitter may be in a fault condition.
Procedure
1. Check the status alerts for active fault conditions.
2. If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its behavior, change the setting of mA Output Fault Action .
3. If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
17.23 Trim mA Output
Trimming an mA Output calibrates the transmitter mA Output to the receiving device. If the current trim value is inaccurate, the transmitter will under-compensate or over-compensate the output.
17.23.1 Trim an mA Output using the display
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → mA Output Trim and select the output to trim.
2. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
3. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than − 20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps, contact customer service.
17.23.2 Trim mA Output using ProLink III
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
Procedure
1. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
2. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than − 20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps, contact customer service.
214 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
17.23.3 Trim mA output using a web browser
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
Procedure
1. Choose Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → mA Output Trim .
2. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
3. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than − 20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps, contact customer service.
17.24 Check the pickoff voltage
If the pickoff voltage readings are unusually low, you may have any of a variety of process or equipment problems.
To know whether your pickoff voltage is unusually low, you must collect pickoff voltage data during the problem condition and compare it to pickoff voltage data from a period of normal operation.
Drive gain and pickoff voltage are inversely proportional. As drive gain increases, pickoff voltages decrease and vice versa.
Table 17-7: Possible causes and recommended actions for low pickoff voltage
Possible cause
Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and transmitter
Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor
Sensor tubes are not vibrating
Recommended actions
Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter.
Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of the sensor.
• Check for plugging or deposition.
• Ensure that the vibrating element is free to vibrate (no mechanical binding).
• Verify wiring.
Moisture in the sensor electronics
The sensor is damaged, or sensor magnets may have become demagnetized
Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.
Replace the sensor.
17.25 Check power supply wiring
If the power supply wiring is damaged or improperly connected, the transmitter may not receive enough power to operate properly.
Prerequisites
• You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 215
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Procedure
1. Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter power supply terminals.
• If the voltage is within the specified range, you do not have a power supply problem.
• If the voltage is low, ensure that the power supply is adequate at the source, the power cable is sized correctly, there is no damage to the power cable, and an appropriate fuse is installed.
• If there is no power, continue with this procedure.
2.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
Before inspecting the power supply wiring, disconnect the power source.
3. Ensure that the terminals, wires, and wiring compartment are clean and dry.
4. Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals.
5. Ensure that the power supply wires are making good contact, and are not clamped to the wire insulation.
6.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not reapply power to the transmitter with the housing cover removed. Reapplying power to the transmitter while the housing cover is removed could cause an explosion.
Reapply power to the transmitter.
7. Test the voltage at the terminals.
If there is no power, contact customer service.
17.26 1600 Transmitter is not powering on or lost power while using Power on Ethernet (PoE)
Alert
LEDs for power blink off and on or fail to light up.
Cause
The transmitter is not responding.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure the Ethernet cable is properly secured in the Ethernet port.
2. Check the integrity of the CAT5e/CAT6 Ethernet cable is intact and ensure the retainer clip on the
RJ45 connector is not damaged.
3. Verify the length of the Ethernet cable is less than 328 ft (100 m) from the PoE Power Source
Equipment (PSE).
4. Verify that the PSE is either Type 1 or Type 2 compliant with PoE Standards IEEE 802.3af or IEEE
802.3at.
5. Refer to Check for internal electrical problems .
216 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
6. Verify the PSE is powered properly.
7. Check the 1600 RJ45 terminal voltage (38V ∼ 57V) by contacting customer service.
17.27 Check for radio frequency interference (RFI)
The transmitter Frequency Output or Discrete Output can be affected by radio frequency interference (RFI).
Possible sources of RFI include a source of radio emissions, or a large transformer, pump, or motor that can generate a strong electromagnetic field. Several methods to reduce RFI are available. Use one or more of the following suggestions, as appropriate to your installation.
Procedure
• Use shielded cable between the output and the receiving device.
— Terminate the shielding at the receiving device. If this is impossible, terminate the shielding at the cable gland or conduit fitting.
— Do not terminate the shielding inside the wiring compartment.
— 360-degree termination of shielding is unnecessary.
• Eliminate the RFI source.
• Move the transmitter.
17.28 Check sensor-to-transmitter wiring
A number of power-supply and output problems may occur if the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter is improperly connected, or if the wiring becomes damaged.
Be sure to check all wiring segments:
• If you have a 9-wire transmitter, check the wiring between the transmitter and the sensor junction box.
Prerequisites
You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Before opening the wiring compartments, disconnect the power source.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
2. Verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the information provided in the installation manual.
3. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
4. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
Configuration and Use Manual 217
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
17.29 Using sensor simulation for troubleshooting
When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports user-specified values for basic process variables.
This allows you to reproduce various process conditions or to test the system.
You can use sensor simulation to help distinguish between legitimate process noise and externally caused variation. For example, consider a receiving device that reports an unexpectedly erratic density value. If sensor simulation is enabled and the observed density value does not match the simulated value, the source of the problem is likely to be somewhere between the transmitter and the receiving device.
Sensor simulation requires an enhanced core and a communication device.
Important
When sensor simulation is active, the simulated value is used in all transmitter outputs and calculations, including totals and inventories, volume flow calculations, and concentration calculations. Disable all automatic functions related to the transmitter outputs and place the loop in manual operation. Do not enable simulation mode unless your application can tolerate these effects, and be sure to disable simulation mode when you have finished testing.
17.30 Check the printing
Procedure
1. Verify that the printer is powered.
2. Verify the physical connections.
3. Verify the network settings configuration.
4. Verify that the printer is online.
See the printer manual for descriptions of status LEDs.
5. If the printer is offline: a) Check the paper.
b) Verify the paper cover is closed correctly.
17.31 Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)
Two-phase flow can cause rapid changes in the drive gain. This can cause a variety of measurement issues.
Procedure
1. Check for two-phase flow alerts (e.g., A105).
If the transmitter is not generating two-phase flow alerts, verify that two-phase flow limits have been set. If limits are set, two-phase flow is not the source of your problem.
2. Check the process for cavitation, flashing, or leaks.
3. Monitor the density of your process fluid output under normal process conditions.
4. Check the settings of Two-Phase Flow Low Limit , Two-Phase Flow High Limit , and Two-Phase Flow
Timeout .
218 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Tip
You can reduce the occurrence of two-phase flow alerts by setting Two-Phase Flow Low Limit to a lower value, Two-Phase Flow High Limit to a higher value, or Two-Phase Flow Timeout to a higher value.
17.32 Check the sensor coils
Checking the sensor coils can identify a cause for a no sensor response alert.
Restriction
This procedure applies only to 9-wire remote-mount transmitters. For integral mount transmitters, consult the factory.
Procedure
1. Disconnect power to the transmitter.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
2. Remove the wires from the sensor junction box.
3. Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the pickoff coils by placing the DMM leads on the unplugged terminal blocks for each terminal pair. See
Table 17-8 for a list of the coils. Record the values.
Table 17-8: Coils and test terminal pairs
Coil
Drive coil
Left pickoff coil (LPO)
Right pickoff coil (RPO)
Resistance temperature detector
(RTD)
Lead length compensator (LLC)
Sensor model
All
All
All
All
Terminal colors
Brown to red
Green to white
Blue to gray
Yellow to violet
Yellow to orange
Composite RTD
Fixed resistor (see note)
All except T-Series and CMF400 (see note)
CMFS025-150 and T-Series
CMFS007, CMFS010, CMFS015,
CMF400, and F300
Yellow to orange
Yellow to orange
Note
The CMF400 fixed resistor applies only to certain specific CMF400 releases. Contact customer support for more information.
There should be no open circuits, that is, no infinite resistance readings. The left pickoff and right pickoff readings should be the same or very close (±5 Ω). If there are any unusual readings, repeat the coil resistance tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty cable. The readings for each coil pair should match at both ends.
Configuration and Use Manual 219
Troubleshooting
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
4. Test the terminals in the sensor junction box for shorts to case.
a) Leave the terminal blocks disconnected.
b) Remove the lid of the junction box.
c) Testing one terminal at a time, place a DMM lead on the terminal and the other lead on the sensor case.
With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.
5. Test the resistance of junction box terminal pairs.
a) Test the brown terminal against all other terminals except the red one.
b) Test the red terminal against all other terminals except the brown one.
c) Test the green terminal against all other terminals except the white one.
d) Test the white terminal against all other terminals except the green one.
e) Test the blue terminal against all other terminals except the gray one.
f) Test the gray terminal against all other terminals except the blue one.
g) Test the orange terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and violet ones.
h) Test the yellow terminal against all other terminals except the orange and violet ones.
i) Test the violet terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and orange ones.
There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short between terminals.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
1. Replace the lid on the sensor junction box.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
220 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using the transmitter display
November 2022
A Using the transmitter display
This section explains how to use the 1600 display. Using the display, you can move through the menus, configure the application, monitor and control the application, and perform maintenance and diagnostic tasks.
A.1 Components of the transmitter display
The transmitter display includes two status LEDs, a multi-line LCD panel, and four membrane arrow keys — left, up, down, and right — used to access the display menus and navigate the display screens.
Figure A-1: 1600 transmitter display
A. Status LED
B. LCD Display
Status LEDs
The status LEDs indicate the current state of the transmitter ( STATUS ) and the current state of the Ethernet network ( NET ). From the display, the symbol “√” on the right side is the transmitter status LED. The symbol
“NET” on the left side is the network status LED. The 1600 status LED supports NE107 mode. For configuration information, see the Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters: Configuration and Use
Manual .
Configuration and Use Manual 221
Using the transmitter display
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table A-1: Status LED and device status (MMI mode)
Status LED condition
Solid green
Solid yellow
Solid red
Flashing yellow (1 Hz)
Device status
No alerts are active.
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Out of Specification,
Maintenance Required, or Function Check.
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Failure.
The Function Check in Progress alert is active.
Table A-2: Network status LED and Ethernet network connection status
Network status LED condition
Flashing green
Solid green
Flashing red
Solid red
Network status
No connections made with primary protocol host.
Connection made with primary protocol host.
Connection from primary protocol host has timed out.
Address Conflict Detection (ACD) algorithm has detected a duplicate IP address
(All 1600 transmitter Ethernet communications are stopped.)
LCD panel
In normal operation, the LCD panel shows the current value of the display variables, and their measurement units.
The LCD panel also provides access to the display menus and alert information. From the display menus, you can:
• View the current configuration and make configuration changes.
• Perform procedures such as loop testing and zero verification.
• Run batches.
The alert information allows you to see which alerts are active, acknowledge the alerts individually or as a group, and to see more detailed information for individual alerts.
A.2 Access and use the display menus
The display menus allow you to perform most configuration, administration, and maintenance tasks.
The four switches, ⇦⇧⇩⇨ , are used to navigate the menus, make selections, and enter data.
Procedure
1. Observe the action bar at the bottom of the LCD panel.
The action bar displays Menu ⇨ .
2. Press your thumb or finger over the ⇨ membrane switch to activate it.
The top-level menu is displayed.
3. Navigate the menus using the four membrane switches:
• Activate ⇧ or ⇩ to scroll to the previous or next item in the menu.
222 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using the transmitter display
November 2022
• Activate and hold ⇧ or ⇩ (approximately 1 second) to scroll rapidly through numbers or menu options.
• Activate ⇨ to drill down to a lower menu or to select an option.
• Activate and hold ⇨ to save and apply your action.
• Activate ⇦ to return to the previous menu.
• Activate and hold ⇦ to cancel your action.
The action bar is updated with context-sensitive information. The ⇨ and ⇦ symbols indicate the associated membrane switch.
If the menu or the topic is too large for a single display screen, the ⇩ and ⇧ symbols at the bottom and top of the LCD panel are used to indicate that you must scroll down or up to see more information.
Figure A-2: Navigation arrows
Configuration and Use Manual 223
Using the transmitter display
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
4. If you make a menu choice that leads back to the main menu, or changes to certain procedures such as zero calibration:
• If display security is not enabled, the display prompts you to activate ⇦⇩⇨ , in that order. This feature protects against accidental changes to configuration, but does not provide any security.
Figure A-3: Security prompts
224
• If display security is enabled, the display prompts you to enter the display password.
Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using the transmitter display
November 2022
5. If you make a menu choice that requires entering a numeric value or character string, the display provides a screen similar to the following:
Figure A-4: Numeric values and character strings
• Activate ⇦ or ⇨ to position the cursor.
• Activate ⇧ and ⇩ to scroll through the values that are valid for that position.
• Repeat until all characters are set.
• Activate and hold ⇨ to save the value.
6. To exit the display menu system, use either of the following methods:
• Wait until the menu times out and returns to the display variables.
• Exit each menu separately, working your way back to the top of the menu system.
Configuration and Use Manual 225
Using the transmitter display
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
226 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
November 2022
B Using ProLink III with the transmitter
B.1 Basic information about ProLink III
ProLink III is a configuration and service tool available from Micro Motion. ProLink III runs on a Windows platform and provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
Version requirements
Use the latest version of ProLink III and the device firmware to support all features. For details about ProLink III device support, refer to the ProLink III ChangeLog.txt
file.
ProLink III requirements
To install ProLink III, you must have:
• The ProLink III installation media
• The ProLink III installation kit for your connection type:
— Cables and connectors: USB-C to USB-A cable or USB-C to USB-A adapter
— Cables and connectors: Ethernet port
To obtain ProLink III and the appropriate installation kit, contact customer support.
ProLink III documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with ProLink III or that you have a general familiarity with Windows programs. If you need more information than this manual provides, see the
Micro Motion ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual .
In most ProLink III installations, the manual is installed with the ProLink III program. Additionally, the
ProLink III manual is available on the documentation CD or at Emerson.com
.
ProLink III features and functions
ProLink III offers complete transmitter configuration and operation functions. ProLink III also offers a number of additional features and functions, including:
• A Professional version with expanded features not available on the Basic version
• The ability to save the transmitter configuration set to a file on the PC, and reload it or propagate it to other transmitters
• The ability to log specific types of data to a file on the PC
• The ability to view performance trends for various types of data on the PC
• The ability to connect to and view information for more than one device
• A guided connection wizard
These features are documented in the Micro Motion ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual . ProLink III features are not documented in this manual.
ProLink III messages
As you use ProLink III with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Configuration and Use Manual 227
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
B.2 Connect with ProLink III
A connection from ProLink III to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
B.2.1 ProLink III connection types
There are two ways to connect a ProLink III PC to the transmitter: direct connection to an Ethernet port, and connection to a local area Ethernet network.
B.2.2 Configuring transmitter and PC Ethernet settings
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Ethernet Settings → Network settings
Device Tools → Configuration → Network Settings
Configuration → Ethernet Settings
Prerequisites
One of the following:
• An Ethernet cable directly connected between Channel A and an Ethernet port on a PC.
• The transmitter and a PC connected to the same Ethernet network.
Refer to the installation manual for information about making cable connections to the transmitter.
Note
The Ethernet settings are the same for a ProLink III connection over Ethernet as they are for connecting to a web browser.
Procedure
Configure Ethernet settings as required.
• Use the display, ProLink III, or a web browser to configure the transmitter.
• Use the PC control panel to configure the PC network adapter.
228 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
November 2022
Table B-1: Transmitter and PC network settings
Connection type
Direct connection : Ethernet cable connected directly between Channel A and the PC Ethernet adapter.
Transmitter network settings
• Auto Obtain IP (DHCP) : Disabled
• IP address : any IP address in the same subnet as the PC network adapter. Recommended
192.168.0.1
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0 (this indicates that no gateway will be used)
PC network adapter IPv4 settings
• Auto Obtain IP (DHCP) : Disabled
• IP address : any IP address in the same subnet as the PC network adapter. Recommended
192.168.0.2
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway : none (leave blank)
Local network connection : The transmitter and PC are connected to a common network with a DHCP.
All settings to be assigned by network administrator. Typical network settings shown.
• Auto Obtain IP (DHCP) : Enabled
• IP address : automatically assigned by a DHCP server
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0 (this indicates that no gateway will be used)
All settings to be assigned by network administrator.
Note
If your PC has more than one wired network adapter, be sure to select the adapter that is connected to the transmitter.
B.2.3 Connect ProLink III to the transmitter
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
Prerequisites
The transmitter and PC must be properly configured and physically connected to each other by an Ethernet cable, or they must both be connected to a local area Ethernet network.
Procedure
1. Start ProLink III.
2. Choose Connect to Physical Device .
3. Select a Protocol and related settings:
• For Ethernet connection:
— Select Modbus TCP
— Type in the IP Address of the transmitter
Configuration and Use Manual 229
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
November 2022
— Leave the remaining settings at their default values
4. Select Connect .
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
230 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
C Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
C.1 Recommended web browsers
Browser
Mozilla Firefox
Google Chrome
Version
3.5 or newer
5.0 or newer
C.2 Configuring transmitter and PC Ethernet settings
Display
ProLink III
Web browser
Menu → Configuration → Ethernet Settings → Network settings
Device Tools → Configuration → Network Settings
Configuration → Ethernet Settings
Prerequisites
One of the following:
• An Ethernet cable directly connected between Channel A and an Ethernet port on a PC.
• The transmitter and a PC connected to the same Ethernet network.
Refer to the installation manual for information about making cable connections to the transmitter.
Note
The Ethernet settings are the same for a ProLink III connection over Ethernet as they are for connecting to a web browser.
Procedure
Configure Ethernet settings as required.
• Use the display, ProLink III, or a web browser to configure the transmitter.
• Use the PC control panel to configure the PC network adapter.
Configuration and Use Manual 231
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Table C-1: Transmitter and PC network settings
Connection type
Direct connection : Ethernet cable connected directly between Channel A and the PC Ethernet adapter.
Transmitter network settings
• Auto Obtain IP (DHCP) : Disabled
• IP address : any IP address in the same subnet as the PC network adapter. Recommended
192.168.0.1
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0 (this indicates that no gateway will be used)
PC network adapter IPv4 settings
• Auto Obtain IP (DHCP) : Disabled
• IP address : any IP address in the same subnet as the PC network adapter. Recommended
192.168.0.2
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway : none (leave blank)
Local network connection : The transmitter and PC are connected to a common network with a DHCP.
All settings to be assigned by network administrator. Typical network settings shown.
• Auto Obtain IP (DHCP) : Enabled
• IP address : automatically assigned by a DHCP server
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0 (this indicates that no gateway will be used)
All settings to be assigned by network administrator.
Note
If your PC has more than one wired network adapter, be sure to select the adapter that is connected to the transmitter.
C.3 Log in with a web browser using a secure connection
You must enable the web server SSL/TLS in order to log in with a web browser. The SSL Certificate shipped with the transmitter is for IP address 192.168.0.1. After configuring the IP address, you must download a new
SSL Certificate, and then import the new certificate into the web browser.
The 1600 Ethernet transmitter is shipped with SSL disabled by default. This procedure is applicable only if the
SSL is enabled. If the SSL/TLS is enabled, and you changed the default IP address, order of operation is as follows:
1. Enable SSL/TLS.
2. Change the IP address.
Prerequisites
To log in to the transmitter with a web browser:
• The PC and transmitter must have been properly configured for their connection type.
• You must know the IP address of the transmitter.
• The transmitter SSL Certificate must be accessed from one of the following options:
232 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
—
.
—
It must be imported into the browser in the Trusted Root store. For instructions, see Import the SSL
Certificate into Microsoft ® Windows ® .
Procedure
1. Enter the IP address of the transmitter in the web browser address bar.
When the transmitter is found, the login page appears.
2. Enter the login credentials.
Two users are predefined. You can change the passwords, but you cannot add or delete users.
Table C-2: Login credentials
Username
Admin
Description
Complete access:
• Can perform operator functions, such as meter verification, zero verification, starting/stopping batches, starting/stopping totals, and resetting totals
• Can view and make changes to transmitter configuration
Operator Limited access:
• Can perform operator functions, such as meter verification, zero verification, starting/stopping batches, starting/stopping totals, and resetting totals
• Can view transmitter configuration, but cannot make changes
Note
Transmitters using the default Admin password are not secure. You will see an alert if you do not change the default passwords for Admin and Operator. If you do not plan on using the web server and want to resolve the alert, disable the web server.
Upon successful login, the home page of the transmitter displays.
Configuration and Use Manual 233
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Figure C-1: Transmitter home page
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
C.4 Log in with a web browser using an unsecure connection
Prerequisites
To log in to the transmitter with a web browser:
• The PC and transmitter must have been properly configured for their connection type.
• You must know the IP address of the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Enter the IP address of the transmitter in the web browser address bar.
When the transmitter is found, the login page appears.
2. Enter the login credentials.
Two users are predefined. You can change the passwords, but you cannot add or delete users.
Table C-3: Login credentials
Username
Admin
Description
Complete access:
• Can perform operator functions, such as meter verification, zero verification, starting/stopping batches, starting/stopping totals, and resetting totals
• Can view and make changes to transmitter configuration
234 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Table C-3: Login credentials (continued)
Username
Operator
Description
Limited access:
• Can perform operator functions, such as meter verification, zero verification, starting/stopping batches, starting/stopping totals, and resetting totals
• Can view transmitter configuration, but cannot make changes
Note
Transmitters using the default Admin password are not secure. You will see an alert if you do not change the default passwords for Admin and Operator. If you do not plan on using the web server and want to resolve the alert, disable the web server.
Upon successful login, the home page of the transmitter displays.
Figure C-2: Transmitter home page
C.5 Change Ethernet login passwords
ProLink III
Menu → Configuration → Security → Webserver security
Prolink III USB-C Service Port Connection
Configuration → Security
(1) Applicable only when the web server is enabled.
(2) You must log in as administrator on a secured connection.
Configuration and Use Manual 235
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
The Ethernet login passwords prevent unauthorized access to the transmitter. Immediately change the
Admin and Operator passwords from the default password, and keep them confidential.
Important
ProLink III will neither display nor allow a password change if connected through Ethernet with MODBUS/TCP.
Procedure
Enter new passwords for Admin Password and Operator Password .
Passwords must have:
• At least 8, but no more than 14 characters.
• At least one uppercase letter
• At least one lowercase letter
• At least one number
• At least one special character (! " # $ % ' ( ) * + , - · & / : ; = > < ?
C.6 Loading an SSL Certificate from a PC to a 1600 transmitter through ProLink III
This procedure imports the certificate for your computer and will be applied to Google Chrome ™
computer. See Recommended web browsers
.
used on that
Prerequisites
1. Ensure that the 1600 transmitter and the PC that contaisn the SSL Certificate are connected through a
USB type-C cable.
Procedure
1. Open ProLink III and ensure the 1600 transmitter can be recognized correctly.
236
2. Open file explorer for ProLink III: Device Tools → File Transfer → File Explorer .
3. From the right pane of file explorer, navigate into the web folder.
4. Locate the SSL key or SSL cert file that you want to upload to the 1600 transmitter (the left pane of file explorer).
Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
5. Select the appropriate files (for this example, mmi-ecc-cert_test.cer
and mmi-ecccert_test.cer
) and click Transfer file to device .
6. Verify that the transferring process has completed.
A message displays telling you that the import was successful.
C.7 Import the SSL Certificate into Microsoft
®
Windows
®
This procedure imports the certificate for your computer and will be applied to Google Chrome ™
computer. See Recommended web browsers
.
used on that
Procedure
1. Open the Start menu and type mmc in the search box.
2. Go to File → Add/Remove Snap-in… .
3. Select Certificates from the left pane.
4. Select Add in the center of the window to add Certificates to the Selected snap-ins pane.
Configuration and Use Manual 237
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
5. Select the radio button for Computer account .
6. Select Next and then select the radio button for Local Computer .
7. Select Finish and then OK .
8. From Console Root to Certificates → Trusted Root Certification Authorities , expand Certificates .
Important
You must import the certificate to the Trusted Root store.
9. Right-click Certificates and select All Tasks → Import…
The Certificate Import Wizard displays.
10. Select Next and verify that the certificate is being placed in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store.
11. Select Next and then Finish .
A message displays telling you that the import was successful.
The Certificate diplays at the top of the main pane, listed by IP address.
C.8 Private key file
Under most circumstances, the private key does not need to be exported, except in a rare case where you can use it to debug a failing TLS connection. In that case, once it is exported into the open world, it is safer to regenerate a new key after the issue is resolved. You can debug almost all TLS connection problems without needing to see the private key.
To generate a new certificate, change the IP address. If you want the same IP address, change it back. On each acceptance of a new IP address, a new certificate is generated.
C.9 Import from a Certificate Authority
You have the option to import a certificate and a private key pair obtained from a Certificate Authority (CA).
The transmitter accepts certificates and keys that match the following requirements:
• ECDSA (ECC) private keys on one of NIST P-256 curve
• Certificates including the following signature types (on the above curve):
— + ecdsa-with-SHA1
— + ecdsa-with-SHA256
— + ecdsa-with-SHA384
— + ecdsa-with-SHA512
Note
Keys and certificates using RSA will not work with the transmitter.
238 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Prerequisites
• The files must be titled, mmi-ecc-cert.cer
and mmi-ecc-key.cer
.
• The certificate and private key must match the algorithms and key sizes configured for the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 239
Using a web browser to configure the transmitter
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
240 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Concentration measurement matrices
November 2022
D Concentration measurement matrices
D.1 Standard matrices for the concentration measurement application
The standard concentration matrices available from Micro Motion are applicable for a variety of process fluids.
These matrices are included in the ProLink III installation folder.
Tip
If the standard matrices are not appropriate for your application, you can build a custom matrix or purchase a custom matrix from Micro Motion.
Matrix name
Deg Balling
Deg Brix
Deg Plato
HFCS 42
HFCS 55
HFCS 90
Description Density unit
Matrix represents percent extract, by mass, in solution, based on °Balling.
For example, if a wort is 10 °Balling and the extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm 3 g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for sucrose solutions that indicates the percent by mass of sucrose in solution at a given temperature. For example,
40 kg of sucrose mixed with 60 kg of water results in a 40 °Brix solution.
Matrix represents percent extract, by mass, in solution, based on °Plato. For example, if a wort is 10 °Plato and the extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm 3 g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 42 (high-fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 55 (high-fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm 3 g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 90 (high-fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
Temperature unit
°F
°C
°F
°C
°C
°C
Derived variable
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Configuration and Use Manual 241
Concentration measurement matrices
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
D.2 Derived variables and calculated process variables
The concentration measurement application calculates a different set of process variables from each derived variable. The process variables are then available for viewing or reporting.
Calculated process variables
Derived variable
Description
Density at Reference
Mass/unit volume, corrected to a given reference temperature
Specific Gravity The ratio of the density of a process fluid at a given temperature to the density of water at a given temperature
Note
The two given temperature conditions do not need to be the same.
Density at reference temp
✓
✓
Standard volume flow rate
✓
✓
Specific gravity
✓
Concentration
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Mass
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
Volume
Concentration
(Density)
Volume
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
The percent mass of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from reference density
The percent mass of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from specific gravity
The percent volume of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from reference density
The percent volume of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from specific gravity
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
242 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Concentration measurement matrices
November 2022
Derived variable
Concentration
(Density)
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
Calculated process variables
Description
The mass, volume, weight, or number of moles of solute or of material in suspension in proportion to the total solution, derived from reference density
The mass, volume, weight, or number of moles of solute or of material in suspension in proportion to the total solution, derived from specific gravity
Density at reference temp
✓
✓
Standard volume flow rate
✓
✓
Specific gravity
✓
Concentration
✓
✓
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Configuration and Use Manual 243
Concentration measurement matrices
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
244 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Environmental compliance
November 2022
E Environmental compliance
E.1 RoHS and WEEE
In compliance with the RoHS directive (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) and the WEEE directive (Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment), the battery in the 1600 transmitter cannot be serviced or replaced by users. If the battery requires replacement, contact customer service for replacement and disposal.
Configuration and Use Manual 245
Example tickets
November 2022
F Example tickets
This appendix provides examples of different types of tickets.
F.1 Print examples
Original tickets
Figure F-1: Sample test page
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Figure F-2: Batch ticket with Weights and Measures not licensed
246 Micro Motion 1600 with Ethernet Transmitters
Configuration and Use Manual
00809-0100-1600
Example tickets
November 2022
Configuration and Use Manual 247
For more information: www.emerson.com
© 2022 Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson
Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, ProLink, MVD and MVD Direct
Connect marks are marks of one of the Emerson Automation
Solutions family of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners.
* 00809-0100-1600*
00809-0100-1600
Rev. AB
2022
Scarica
Link pubblico aggiornato
Il link pubblico alla tua chat è stato aggiornato. Puoi visualizzare e gestire i tuoi link di chat dopo la registrazione qui.
Link pubblico del documento
Pubblicità
